Console and Display Hierarchy

Considerations

Display Design 1 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• You will learn the important console and display hierarchy configurations
to consider when designing your control displays
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will know how to:
– Organize displays for consoles with different-sized screens and single
screens
– Create a display hierarchy and navigation
– Cross Screen Invocation

Display Design 2 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Console configuration


• Display level hierarchy


• Display navigation

Display Design 3 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Console Configuration Honeywell

• Larger screens
– Overview displays
– Monitoring information
– Alarm information
• Smaller screens
– Detail displays
– Help displays
– Control functions

Console with Different-sized Screens

Display Design 4 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Console Configuration Honeywell

• Console with different-sized screens

– View any display on any screen

– Smaller-sized displays
may appear stretched on
larger screens
– Larger sized displays may
Overview Display appear compressed on
smaller screens

Detail Display
Overview Display

Display Design 5 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Console Configuration Honeywell

• Do use progressive disclosure

• Do not create densely populated

displays

Target to Tank
Farm Detail

Console with Single Screen

Display Design 6 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Console Configuration Honeywell
• Use a separate Local Area Network (LAN) PC for non-control
business applications

LAN PC

Display Design 7 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Console configuration


• Display level hierarchy

• Display navigation

Display Design 8 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Level Hierarchy Honeywell
• A typical display hierarchy
Process Area Overview represents four levels of
LEVEL 1 display
graphics

Process Unit Operating

LEVEL 2 display • Each level provides increasing
detail
Process Unit Detail
display
• Aids the operator in
LEVEL 3

performing specific tasks

Procedures

Help displays
LEVEL 4

Loop/trend display

Other supporting
display

Display Design 9 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Level Hierarchy - Level 1 Honeywell

• Level 1 process area overview displays

– Provide a big picture of the process
– Used mainly as an overview

Display Design 10 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Level Examples - 2 Honeywell
• Level 2
Process Area Overview
display
LEVEL 1

Process Unit Operating

display
LEVEL 2

Process Unit Detail

LEVEL 3 display

Procedures

LEVEL 4 Help displays

Loop/trend display

Other supporting
display

Display Design 11 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Level Hierarchy - Level 2 Honeywell

• Level 2 process unit operating displays

– Primary operating displays
– Allow operators to perform common tasks
Display Design 12 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Level Examples - 3 Honeywell
• Level 3
Process Area Overview
display
LEVEL 1

Process Unit Operating

display
LEVEL 2

Process Unit Detail

LEVEL 3 display

Procedures

LEVEL 4 Help displays

Loop/trend display

Other supporting
display

Display Design 13 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Level Hierarchy - Level 3 Honeywell

• Level 3 detail displays

– Provide more detailed information for control
– Present additional information not shown on level 1 and level 2 displays

Display Design 14 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Level Examples - 4 Honeywell
• Level 4
Process Area Overview
display
LEVEL 1

Process Unit Operating

display
LEVEL 2

Process Unit Detail

LEVEL 3 display

Procedures

LEVEL 4 Help displays

Loop/trend display

Other supporting
display

Display Design 15 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Level Hierarchy - Level 4 Honeywell

Alarm
Displays

Procedures

Loop tune
Displays

• Level 4 support displays

– Present additional support information, help displays, startup/shutdown
procedures and optional screens to aid in operating and reporting

Display Design 16 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Level Hierarchy Honeywell
• A display hierarchy should be:
LEVEL 1
Process Area Overview
display
– Consistent
– Efficient

Process Unit Operating

LEVEL 2
display

Process Unit Detail

LEVEL 3
display

Procedures

LEVEL 4 Help displays

Loop/trend display

Other supporting
display

Display Design 17 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Diagram - Display Level Hierarchy Honeywell

Cross Area & Special

Feature Menu Navigation

Plant Overview
Level 1

Area Multi Area Intervention Task Unit

Level 2 Overview Overview Display Display Overview

Process Process Process

Level 3 Detail Detail Detail
Display Display Display

Loop/Trend Operating Group Help Alarm

Level 4 Display Procedure Display Displays Summary

Display Design 18 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Console configuration

• Display level hierarchy


• Display navigation

Display Design 19 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Navigation Honeywell

Process Area Overview

LEVEL 1 display

Process Unit Operating Navigate to other Process Unit Operating

LEVEL 2
display level 2 displays display

Process Unit Detail Process Unit Detail

LEVEL 3
display display

Procedures SUPPORT

LEVEL 4 Help displays

Loop/trend display

Other supporting
display

Display Design 20 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Cross Screen Invocation Honeywell

CS

• Add to the Toolbar through Connection Properties Toolbar tab

• Add to a graphic by adding script to a button
– Sample script for sending graphics to another Console station:

'Send Next
Window.external.RequestTask 21, 15, 1, "CStn01-1", 0, 0

'Send Current
Window.external.RequestTask 21, 15, 0, "CStn02-1", 0, 0

'Send Named
Window.external.RequestTask 21, 15, 1, "CStn01-1", 0, 0
Window.external.RequestTask 21, 1, "BoilerPageCallup.htm", 0, 0, 0

Display Design 21 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Cross Screen Guidelines Honeywell
• Limitations

– Currently cross station display invocation is only available between Console

stations and extensions that are members of the same Console. Cross
station activations will not operate on stations that are not part of a Console.

– Cross station display invocation of an HTML page with URL link is not
available.

– Cross station display invocations will be displayed as if the display had been
freshly called up. (i.e. a trend that has been zoomed will be displayed at its
full size when invoked via cross station invocation on another station or
filtered alarm/event/SOE/message summary will not retain the filter).

– When sending a display to a station running Safeview, Safeview will

determine the actual display location.

Display Design 22 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell


• For a console with different-sized screens, use the:
– Larger screens for overview displays, monitoring and alarm information
– Smaller screens for detail displays, help displays and control functions


• A sufficient and effective display hierarchy contains four levels of
graphics that aid the operator perform specific tasks


• Level 2 displays should be the operator’s primary operating displays


• An operator should be able to get from an overview display to a primary
operating display with one click of the mouse

Display Design 23 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Console Configurations and Display Hierarchy

Considerations

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Display Design 24 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Console and Display Hierarchy Considerations 7/5/2023
 HMIWeb Display Design Principles

Display Design 25 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson, you will learn how to design HMIWeb displays
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will know how to use these
elements to design effective displays:

– Color

– Navigation

– Numbers and text

– Shapes

Display Design 26 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Design principles
• Color guidelines
• Display navigation
• Recommendations for numbers and text
• Using shapes
• File naming conventions

Display Design 27 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Design Principles Honeywell
Process Area Overview Display • An effective display design:
– Avoids unnecessary detail

– Presents objects and

information consistently across
similar displays

– Minimizes operator actions (one

click from an Overview to a
Primary display)

Display Design 28 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Display Design Honeywell

Process Unit Operating Display • An effective display design:

– Shows equipment relationships

and operating constraints when
needed

– Makes non-critical parameters

available when needed

Display Design 29 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Display Layout Honeywell
• An effective display layout:
– Maintains a consistent direction of process flow

– Uses size and color to reflect the importance of objects

Process Area Overview Display

Display Design 30 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Flow Lines Honeywell
• An effective display design:
– Minimizes bending and crossing lines
– Indicates the significance of lines that cross or overlap by:
• Breaking or placing the less significant line behind the other
• Breaking the vertical line if the lines are equally significant
– Distinguishes primary flow lines from secondary flow lines

Display Design 31 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Design Principles Honeywell
• An effective display design:
– Limits animation
– Avoids blinking values
– Provides feedback for actions taken
– Can use a display object for acknowledging an alarm

Display Design 32 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Design principles

• Color guidelines
• Display navigation

• Recommendations for numbers and text

• Using shapes

• File naming conventions

Display Design 33 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Background Color Honeywell

Process Unit Operating Display

Gray background reduces monitor glare

Display Design 34 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Display Colors Honeywell

Process Unit Operating Display

• Minimize the number of colors

Display Design 35 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Display Colors Honeywell

Process Area Overview Display Detail Display

Support Display
Process Unit Operating Display

• Minimize the number of colors

• Apply colors consistently across all display levels

Display Design 36 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Display Colors Honeywell
Process Unit Operating Display

• Minimize the number of colors

• Apply colors consistently across all display levels
• Use colors to increase visual relevance of important information

Display Design 37 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Display Colors Honeywell
Process Unit Operating Display

• Minimize the number of colors

• Apply colors consistently across all display levels
• Use colors to increase visual relevance of important information
• Standardize colors
Display Design 38 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Alarm Colors Honeywell

• Alarm colors are based on display guidelines

– Red for urgent or emergency alarms

– Yellow for high priority alarms
– Cyan for low priority alarms

Display Design 39 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Alarm Indications Honeywell

Alarm Priority Alarm Status Characteristics Example

Alarm
URGENT Red, Blink
unacknowledged
Alarm
Red, No Blink
acknowledged
Alarm
HIGH Yellow, Blink
unacknowledged
Alarm Yellow, No
acknowledged Blink
Alarm
LOW Cyan, Blink
unacknowledged
Alarm Cyan, No
acknowledged Blink
Alarm returned Normal color,
Unacknowledged
to normal Hollow, Blink

Display Design 40 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Color Combinations Honeywell
• Design displays to compensate for color deficiencies such as color
blindness
– Avoid these color combinations:

Red and Green

Green and Yellow

White and Cyan

– If the color combinations are unavoidable:

– Vary the saturation and brightness of the individual colors
– Combine objects and properties such as size, shape, text, brightness,
blinking and texture

Display Design 41 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Design principles

• Color guidelines


• Display navigation

• Recommendations for numbers and text

• Using shapes

• File naming conventions

Display Design 42 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Navigation Targets Honeywell

Navigation Navigation
to previous to next
display display

Process Unit Operating Display

• Include targets at the start and end of each process line

– Facilitate navigation
– Provide operators with a sense of process continuity

Display Design 43 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Navigation Targets Honeywell

Navigation
to support
displays,
information

Navigation
to specific
displays,
trends
Process Unit Operating Display

• Include targets for additional support information

– Aid in operating and reporting

Display Design 44 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Navigation Principles Honeywell
• Access:
Process Area Overview
LEVEL 1
display
– Level 1 and level 2 displays with
a single keystroke

LEVEL 2
Process Unit Operating – Level 3 and level 4 displays with
display
a maximum of two keystrokes

Process Unit Detail

LEVEL 3
display • An operator must use the
minimum number of keystrokes
Procedures to find and respond to alarm
conditions
LEVEL 4 Help displays

Loop/trend display

Other supporting
display
Display Level Hierarchy

Display Design 45 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Design principles

• Color guidelines

• Display navigation


• Recommendations for numbers and text

• Using shapes

• File naming conventions

Display Design 46 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Numbers and Text Honeywell
• Numbers should have the appropriate level of precision
• Include a Title on displays

Process Unit Operating Display

Display Design 47 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Numbers and Text Honeywell
• Abbreviations and Symbols should be consistent
• Font type and Size should be standardized and consistent -- use upper
and lower case lettering

Process Unit Overview Display

Display Design 48 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Design principles

• Color guidelines

• Display navigation

• Recommendations for numbers and text


• Using shapes

• File naming conventions

Display Design 49 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Using Shapes Honeywell

• A shape is a "custom
object”
• Shapes include:
– Static shapes
– Shape sequences
– Dynamic shapes

• Use shapes multiple

times in the same
display
Process Unit Operating Display

Create libraries of reusable shapes

Display Design 50 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Design principles

• Color guidelines

• Display navigation

• Using numbers and text

• Using shapes


• File naming conventions

Display Design 51 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Shape Sequence File Names Honeywell

Shape
Sequence Orientation Identifier

SS_Description_XXX.sha

Description/Name of System File

Shape Extension

• Examples of shape sequence file names:

– SS_RegValve_Up.sha
– SS_Pump_Right.sha

Display Design 52 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Dynamic Shape File Names Honeywell

Dynamic
Shape Orientation Identifier

DS_Description_XXX.sha

Description/Name of System File

Shape Extension

• Examples of dynamic shape file names:

– DS_RegCtlOP_Bottom.sha
– DS_PointID_SP_PV_OP.sha

Display Design 53 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Main/Process Graphic File Names Honeywell

Station/Asset
Prefix

S02_Description.htm

Use descriptive System File

display names Extension

• Examples of main file names:

– A06_Boilers.htm
– S01_HoldingTanks.htm

Display Design 54 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Object Names Honeywell

Object Type Default HDB Naming Prefix Example

Checkbox Checkbox1 Chk ChkReadOnly
Command Button PushButton1 Cmd CmdStartProgram
Combobox Combobox1 Cbo CboPointList
Option Button OptionButton1 Opt OptAlarmInhibit
Text Box Textbox1 Txt TxtStatus
List Box Listbox1 Lst LstModes
ActiveX Control Control1 Ctr CtrTrend
ActiveX Document Activexdoc1 Axd AxdExcel
Push Button Pushbutton1 Psh PshStart
Picture Picture1 Pic PicNiceImage
Label Label1 Lbl LblExplanation
Dialog Dialog1 Dlg DlgFileOpen
Form Form1 Frm FrmIntro

Microsoft’s Proposed Naming Conventions

Display Design 55 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Object Names Honeywell

Object Type Default HDB Prefix Example

naming
Rectangle Rect1 Rec RecHouse
Shape Shape1 Shp ShpAlarm
Wedge Wedge1 Wdg WdgPie
Arc Arc1 Arc ArcWater
Indicator Indicator1 Ind IndTemperature
Polygon Polygon1 Plg PlgProfile
Polyline Polyline1 Pll PllWater
Line Line1 Lin LinWater
Oval Oval1 Ovl OvlTank
RoundRect Roundrect1 Rrc RrcVessel
Alpha Alpha1 Alp AlpLevel
Object with database connection Various names Con ConAlpLevel
Object with script attached* Various names Sc ScTxtTarget
Object with database connection and script Various names ScCon ScConAlpTemp
attached*

Additional Naming Conventions for Objects

Display Design 56 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell

• HMIWeb display design principles:

– Avoid unnecessary detail
– Minimize operator actions
– Present objects, information and process flow consistently
– Avoid blinking values

• Color design principles

– A gray background reduces monitor glare
– Red is recommended for urgent or emergency alarms
– Colors should be standardized -- limit the use of full intensity

• Level 1 and 2 displays, and urgent and high-priority alarm corrective

action should be accessible with one keystroke
• Give displays meaningful names and rename each object added to a
display

Display Design 57 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe HMIWeb Display Design Principles

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Display Design 58 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Design Principles 7/5/2023
 Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles

Display Design 59 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• This lesson introduces you to
Safeview, a software program
that allows you to design and
manage the placement of
windows in an Experion PKS
station.

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to

identify:
– The purpose and benefits of Safeview
– Safeview design considerations
– Safeview workspace configurations

Display Design 60 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Purpose and benefits of Safeview


• Safeview design considerations


• Safeview workspace configurations

Display Design 61 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Managing the Workspace Honeywell

The user has

to manage the
workspace

Typical Multi-window Environment

Display Design 62 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Safeview Purpose Honeywell

Safeview
manages the
workspace for
the user

Example Safeview Environment

Display Design 63 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Safeview Benefits Honeywell

Console Station Static Flex Station

• SafeView manages windows on consoles and static stations

Display Design 64 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Safeview Benefits Honeywell

Application Overlap

• SafeView manages windows on console and static stations

• SafeView prevents a loss of view or application overlap

Display Design 65 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Safeview Benefits Honeywell

Screen with 5 Safeview Regions

• SafeView manages windows on console and static stations

• SafeView prevents a loss of view or application overlap
• SafeView organizes screens into regions that support designated types
of displays or applications
Display Design 66 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Purpose and benefits of Safeview


• Safeview design considerations

• Safeview workspace configurations

Display Design 67 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Multi-window Design Honeywell

• Consider what applications or

displays will appear in the
windows, then design the
Safeview workspace

Station Connection Properties

Multi-window Design with 3 Display Groups

Display Design 68 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Multi-window Design Honeywell
• Consider the screen resolution and window/display sizes when building
graphics for use with Safeview

Display Design 69 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Safeview Design Concepts Honeywell
• Design well-organized groups of windows

Display Design 70 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Purpose and benefits of Safeview

• Safeview design considerations


• Safeview workspace configurations

Display Design 71 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Round Robin Configuration Honeywell
• Window replacement style in which the newest display requested
automatically replaces the oldest

Window 1 Window 2

Window 4 Window 3

Display Design 72 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Manual Select Configuration Honeywell
• Window replacement style in which the operator manually selects the
the window where the display will appear

Display Design 73 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
First Match Configuration Honeywell
• Window replacement style in which each window displays its own
specific type of displays or applications, independent of the others

Display Design 74 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When designing multi-window displays for an Experion PKS screen with
Safeview, remember:

– Safeview manages the workspace for the user by supporting the multi-
window operating environment, preventing loss of view or application
overlap and organizing screens into regions that support designated types of
displays or applications

– Consider screen resolution, window/display sizes and well-organized

groupings of windows when designing graphics for use with Safeview

– Three types of Safeview workspace definitions can be configured when

designing multi-window displays--round robin, manual select and first match

Display Design 75 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Display Design 76 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Experion PKS Safeview Design Principles 7/5/2023
 HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations

Display Design 77 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• This lesson introduces you to the factors that affect the performance of
HMIWeb displays
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will know how to:
– Evaluate the factors which impact display performance
– Analyze the load of an HMIWeb display
– Identify commonly-made mistakes
– Apply a performance rule of thumb to your displays

Display Design 78 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Factors impacting display performance

• The load of an HMIWeb display
• Commonly-made display mistakes
• Performance rule of thumb

Display Design 79 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Factors Impacting Display Performance Honeywell

• Number of static display objects

• Use of bitmaps
• Use of and number of active objects
• Use of standard functionality versus custom-made functionality
• Unused object behavior
• Use of ActiveX objects
• Correct display sizing
• Embedded versus linked shapes
• Display file residence and search paths
• Scripts
• Parameter limit

Display Design 80 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Reduce the Number of Static Objects Honeywell
• Draw complex lines with the Polyline tool rather than drawing a series of
straight lines with the Line tool

• Use two-dimensional (2-D) shapes whenever possible and avoid

creating three-dimensional (3-D) shapes, which may be a buildup of
many lines

2-D shape 3-D shape

Display Design 81 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Reduce the Number of Static Objects Honeywell
• Tip: For several static objects that have been grouped, use the
Combine tool to convert the grouped objects into one object

Combine tool

Before using “Combine” After using “Combine”

Display Design 82 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Combine Objects to Improve Performance Honeywell
• Vector objects are line based objects – such as rectangles, ovals
and polylines
• Combining converts the objects into a single metafile that is
easier to render
• To combine vector graphic objects:

1. Select the objects

2. Click the Group tool on the Arrange Toolbar to group

Group tool
the objects

3. Click the Combine tool on the Transformations Toolbar

Combine tool

• Note in Object Explorer how the group is converted into a single object

Before combining After combining

Display Design 83 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
How to Uncombine Objects Honeywell
• To uncombine a previously combined object:
1. Select the object and click the Uncombine tool on
the Transformations Toolbar
Uncombine tool
The combined object reverts to a group

2. If necessary, you can click the Ungroup tool to ungroup

the objects
Ungroup tool

Display Design 84 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Reduce the Use of Bitmaps Honeywell
• 3-D objects and bitmaps:
– Provide no additional information to an operator
– May take attention away from an operator’s focus and have a negative
impact on performance
– Take more engineering hours to build, modify and maintain

Bitmap

Display Design 85 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Minimize Active Objects Honeywell
• Active objects:
– Include alphanumerics, indicators and animation
– Retrieve multiple process parameters from the Server
– Can increase complexity and clutter the display

Process Unit Operating Display

Display Design 86 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Use Standard Functionality Honeywell
To improve display performance…

• Use shape sequences

• Do not use scripts, unless necessary
• For example:
– Use a shape sequence to change the color
of an object or use the Animation option in
properties
Shape Sequence for Color Change
– To present a mode with only one
character, show the value as text and
format it to show only one character
(i.e. M, A, C, etc.)
– Use shape sequences or acronyms to
convert enumerated text into shorter
text; for example, PVHighHigh into HH

Shape Sequence for Shorter Text

Display Design 87 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Object Behaviors Honeywell
• Deselect unnecessary object behaviors
• Some behaviors, such as color breakpoints, involve additional
processing, even if unused

Display Design 88 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
ActiveX Objects Honeywell
• Minimize the use of ActiveX objects
– ActiveX controls take slightly longer to load than native/basic HMIWeb
objects
– ActiveX may also have a negative impact on the stability of HMIWeb
displays

Basic
HMIWeb ActiveX
Combobox Object

Display Design 89 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Sizing Honeywell
• Size displays to fit Station’s setup
– Render the display in Station at 100% magnification, without scrollbars
– For a full screen display, if the monitor resolution is 1024 X 768 pixels, use
HMIWeb Display Builder’s defaults (1020 X 589 pixels)

Display
Size

Display Design 90 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Sizing Honeywell
• For a monitor resolution different from 1024 X 768, determine the
optimum display size
– As a starting point, create a display that is 4 pixels narrower and 179 pixels
shorter than the monitor resolution
– For example, if the resolution is 1280 X 1024, test a display that is
1276 x 845 pixels

Display Design 91 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Embedded Versus Linked Shapes Honeywell
• Embed shapes, do not link them

Right
Click

Display Design 92 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Embedded Versus Linked Shapes Honeywell
• Disadvantages to embedding shapes
– File size is slightly larger
– If you change the shape, you have to update all displays that contain
the shape
• Updating shapes for multiple displays is easy:

Display Design 93 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Embedded Versus Linked Shapes Honeywell
• If a display already contains linked shapes, you can change them to
embedded shapes:

Display Design 94 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Display File Residence Honeywell
• Run displays locally on the station
– Store graphics and shape libraries on the station hard drive
– Improve station and server performance
• Files don’t have to be fetched over the network from the Server
• Reduces communication traffic and call-up delays

Console station Static/Flex station

Display Design 95 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Display File Residence Honeywell
• Maintain master graphics on the server
– Replicate master graphics at a set time or automatically “on change” to
specified clients

Display Design 96 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Replicate Master Graphics Honeywell

Display Design 97 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Display File Search Paths Honeywell
• Optimize display search paths
1. Deselect the “Search Subdirectories” option in the “Connection Properties”
dialog box
2. In HMIWeb Display Builder, explicitly define each subdirectory that contains
shapes

Display
Search
Paths

Display Design 98 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Performance Improvement Focus Honeywell

• Focus on the most frequently used embedded shapes

– Frequently used, non-optimized embedded shapes can greatly impact
overall performance

Display Design 99 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Scripts Honeywell
• Use centralized code on the Page level when possible
– Avoids redundant code when multiple copies, of a shape with a script, are
inserted in a display
– Reduces the file size of the display

• Do not use General script on the shape level

– This might introduce serious risks when using the same subroutine or
function names in different shapes
• All scripts will be inserted in the HTML display file
• Any shape instances used in that file will refer to the last subroutine
instance whether the code belongs to its own shape or to another shape

Display Design 100 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Parameter Limit Honeywell
• Limit the number of parameters in a display to a maximum of 700,
when possible
– If the parameters exceed 700, call-up time increases and the increase
is non-linear

• If you must exceed 700 parameters in a display, an option would be to

hardcode parameters that never change

Display Design 101 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Factors impacting display performance

• The load of an HMIWeb display

• Commonly-made display mistakes

• Performance rule of thumb

Display Design 102 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Performance Analysis Tool Honeywell
• Enhanced to give a summary of the overall expected performance of a
display

• Summary tab gives an indication

based on the following
categories:
– Data references
– Display complexity
– Advanced features
• Individual performance indicators
listed on the Details tab (shown on
the following slide)

Display Design 103 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Performance Analysis Tool Honeywell
• The Details tab:

– Shows the number of objects,

scripts and other indicators
– Shows the suggested limit
– Allows you to easily focus on
the areas which may need to
be improved

• Improving a display's
performance is an iterative
task

• The counts do not include

items within linked shapes
(but do include items within
embedded shapes)

Display Design 104 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Factors impacting display performance

• The load of an HMIWeb display

• Commonly-made display mistakes

• Performance rule of thumb

Display Design 105 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Commonly-made Display Mistakes Honeywell

• Typical mistakes that cause performance issues are:

– Using too much scripting instead of standard functionality
– Retrieving unnecessary data
– Adding an object in a shape with a database connection just to invoke a
faceplate or a detail display
– Not using Page Scripts
– Using complex 3-D shapes (a buildup of many line elements)
– Linking shapes instead of embedding shapes
– Designing dense displays with too many data points and parameter access

Display Design 106 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Factors impacting display performance

• The load of an HMIWeb display

• Commonly-made display mistakes

• Performance rule of thumb

Display Design 107 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Performance Honeywell
• Display performance depends on many items:
– The way you’ve built your objects
– The way you write your scripts
– The PC you run your display on
– The number of parameters you access
– Where you store and retrieve graphics

• So, a definite formula for display performance cannot be given, but...

Display Design 108 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Display Performance Rule of Thumb Honeywell

Rule of thumb: Every 100 “excessive" parameters

in a display can add ~ 1 second to call up time

• Faster hardware, especially the PC running Station, can help improve

this performance

Display Design 109 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When designing HMIWeb displays, improve the performance of the
displays by:

– Using 2-D objects, not 3-D objects or bitmaps

– Combining grouped objects using the Combine tool
– Minimizing active objects
– Using embedded shapes, not linked ones
– Limiting the parameters in a display to 700

Display Design 110 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Display Design 111 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Display Design 112 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Performance Considerations 7/5/2023
 Course Introduction

Orientation and Course Introduction 113 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Introduction to the course


• Navigating the self-paced computer-based lessons

Orientation and Course Introduction 114 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Purpose of This Course Honeywell
• Experion PKS Control
Execution Environment C200,
C300 and ACE course Human Interface
Console Operations
provides you with the ability
to: Fault Tolerant Ethernet
LAN
– Plan the C200 and C300 Process ACE C300
Server
controller ESV-LCN
Connected
Safety
– Configure C200 and C300 Manager NIM
ControlNet
hardware, control modules
and sequential control
modules
TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

– Build control strategies on PM I/O

the C200, C300 and ACE

HART

Orientation and Course Introduction 115 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Who Should Attend Honeywell
• Experion System implementers responsible for designing and
configuring the system:

– System engineers or application engineers who configure, add to or change

the C200, C300 or ACE controller configuration

– Maintenance engineers or technicians who add new control loops or

troubleshoot existing loops

– Others, whose job functions include performing these tasks

Orientation and Course Introduction 116 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
What You Will Learn Honeywell
• In this course, you will learn to:

– Recognize the role of the major Experion PKS hardware and software
components and learn how data flows through the C200 and C300 controller

– Configure control modules that incorporate data acquisition, regulatory

control, and logic

– Configure sequential control modules (SCMs) used to control process

sequences such as startup, shutdown, and batch operations

– Create parallel steps, in an SCM, for parallel branching

– Configure interactive instruction that allows a seamless combination of
operator-guided manual intervention and automatic control in SCMs

– Configure additional I/O functionality for the PMIO

– Troubleshoot typical errors in configuration
Orientation and Course Introduction 117 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Course Organization Honeywell
• The Experion PKS Control
Execution Environment C200, C300
and ACE course has two sections: Human Interface
Console Operations

1. The basic concepts and strategies

Fault Tolerant Ethernet
needed, to develop guidelines for LAN
ACE
effective and consistent system Process
Server
C300

planning ESV-LCN
Connected
Safety
• Self-paced computer-based Manager NIM
ControlNet
lessons or instructor-delivered
workshops

TPS, TDC2000,
TDC3000
PM I/O

HART

Orientation and Course Introduction 118 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Course Organization Honeywell
2. A hands-on workshop in which you will
build and configure the Experion PKS
C200 and C300 controller
Human Interface
Console Operations
– Hands-on lab exercises with step-
by-step instructions Fault Tolerant Ethernet
LAN
– Assessments to reinforce lab Process
Server
ACE C300

exercises ESV-LCN
Connected
Safety
Manager NIM
ControlNet

TPS, TDC2000,
TDC3000
PM I/O

HART

Orientation and Course Introduction 119 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Introduction to the course


• Navigating the self-paced computer-based lessons

Orientation and Course Introduction 120 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Lesson Window Honeywell

Viewing area

Lesson outline

Navigation bar

Orientation and Course Introduction 121 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Pausing and Playing the Lesson Honeywell

Click Play to resume

Click Pause to stop the lesson

Orientation and Course Introduction 122 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Moving Backward and Forward in the lesson Honeywell

Click screen title

Previous screen Next screen

Orientation and Course Introduction 123 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Volume Control Honeywell

Orientation and Course Introduction 124 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Changing the Viewing Area Honeywell

Click to change
views

Orientation and Course Introduction 125 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Course Introduction

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the first lesson in your course material

Orientation and Course Introduction 126 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Course Introduction 7/5/2023
 Station Toolbar Navigation

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 127 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• This lesson introduces you to navigating HMIWeb displays using the
Station toolbar and menu bar
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will know how to:
– Identify Station toolbar functions
– Navigate using the Station toolbar
– Create a custom menu and navigation commands

Station Custom
Toolbar Menu

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 128 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Station toolbar
• Creating a custom menu and adding navigation commands

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 129 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Station Toolbar Honeywell
• Toolbar buttons provide easy access to frequently used displays and
commands

• For example, to call up the System Menu simply click the toolbar button

– The System Menu is a

specialized system display that
provides quick access to other
displays and Experion PKS
functions

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 130 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Toolbar Buttons Honeywell

• Alarm Summary (F3)

– Calls the Alarm Summary, which provides a
one-line description of each active alarm

• Acknowledge/Silence Alarm (F4)

– Acknowledges a selected alarm

• Associated Display (F2)

– Calls a display associated with the selected
object

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 131 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Toolbar Buttons Honeywell

• Call Up Display (F5)

– Calls a specified display or page:
– Select the Page button
– Type the displays name or number
and press Enter

• Page Down
– Calls the display configured for the
page down function

• Page Up
– Calls the display configured for the
page up function

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 132 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Toolbar Buttons Honeywell

• Navigate Back
– Move backward through displays called
previously
– Click arrow for the list of displays

• Navigate Forward
– Move forward through displays called
previously
– Click arrow for the list of displays
• Reload Page
– Reloads or refreshes the current
display

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 133 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Toolbar Buttons Honeywell

• Trend (F7)
– Calls a specified trend display:
– Select the Trend button
– Type the trend number and press Enter
• Group (F6)
– Calls a specified group display:
– Select the Group button
– Type the group number and press Enter
• Raise/Ramp Up (F9)
– Raises a parameter by a Server-wide configured %

• Lower/Ramp Down (F10)

– Lowers a parameter by a Server-wide configured %

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 134 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Toolbar Buttons Honeywell

• Enter
– Accepts the newly entered value

• Clear
– Cancels the newly entered value and
returns to the original value

• Enable/Disable (F11)
– Enables or disables the associated point

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 135 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Toolbar Buttons Honeywell

• Detail/Search (F12)

– If an alarm is selected on the current display,

click this button to call the Point Detail display
– If nothing is selected, click this button to call a
detail display request prompt

• Zoom
– Changes the magnification of the
current display

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 136 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Standard Toolbar Navigation Honeywell

Navigation Back,
Navigation Forward

Request
Page

Page
Down
Page
Up

Navigation Back and

Navigation forward
can hold up to 20
pages in memory

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 137 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Station toolbar

• Creating a custom menu and adding navigation commands

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 138 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Station Menu Bar Honeywell
• Create and customize drop-down menus to facilitate navigation to
system functions and displays

Standard Custom
Menus Menus

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 139 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Creating a Custom Menu Honeywell

• Configure Experion PKS custom

menus and commands to
provide direct access to
operating displays

• To create a custom menu:

1. Select Station > Connection
Properties from the Station
drop-down menu
2. In Connection Properties,
select the Toolbars tab

3. On the Toolbars tab, click

Customize

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 140 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Creating a Custom Menu Honeywell

4. In Customize, select Header

from the Available Commands
in the Menu tab
5. Click insert to add the
command to the Current
Layout
6. Change the caption from
Header to the new menu
name--this is how the
Debutanizer and Hierarchy
menu names were created
7. Click New Command to add
displays to the menu Change
Caption

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 141 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Adding a Command to a Custom Menu Honeywell

• To add a command, or display,

to the custom menu:
1. Enter the Name to show on the
menu drop-down list in New
Command
2. Enter the Page or display
filename to be called

3. Click OK to save the command

and return to Customize

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 142 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Adding a Command to a Custom Menu Honeywell

4. Select Overview from the

Available Commands list

5. Select Insert. The command

will be inserted under the
selected header
6. Save the file

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 143 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Results Honeywell
• Station toolbar has custom drop-down menu
• Overview is a command in the Hierarchy menu

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 144 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell

• Use the Station toolbar and menu bar to:

– Go to the System Menu

– Identify and acknowledge alarms
– Navigate to associated or prior displays
– Reload a page
– Call trends and groups
– Ramp parameter values up/down
– Search and zoom displays
– Go to displays from custom menus
HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 145 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe Station Toolbar Navigation

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

HMIWeb Display Builder - Station Navigation 146 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Station Toolbar Navigation 7/5/2023
 Describe the C200 Controller Architecture

C200 Controller Architecture 147 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Architecture 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• This lesson introduces you to the Experion PKS C200 controller
architecture

• At the conclusion of this lesson,

you will be able to:

– Identify the high-level Experion ACE

components and connections Server
FTE

– Explain the basic purpose Process C300 Rack

Controllers I/O
of the components and ControlNet I/O Options Series
A
connections
Rail I/O
Series A PM
I/O
Fiber Optic
Isolation

HART
GI/IS Rail I/O
Series H

C200 Controller Architecture 148 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Architecture 7/5/2023
Architecture Overview Honeywell

Unlimited Secure Access State-of –the Art Operation and Engineering Tools
Advanced Applications and Integration
www
Experion
Application Stations Remote
eServer PHD
Control Engineering Historian
Casual Users Environment Wireless
Tools Devices
(Operations and Maintenance)

FTE Network
C200 C300 PMD
ESV-LCN
Connected

Redundant Safety Manager

Servers NIM

Allen-Bradley
ControlLogix
PLC
TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

PM I/O Investment
Digital Video Manager
SCADA Devices
Protection –
(OPC, Modbus , Complete
DH+, and many Integration
Comprehensive more!)

Support for
Smart Field
Ethernet Devices
Video as a Process Input!

C200 Controller Architecture 149 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Architecture 7/5/2023
C200 Architecture Honeywell
Experion Server ACE

FTE

Process
Controllers

ControlNet I/O Options

Rack I/O
Rail I/O Series A
Series A

C300

PM I/O

Fiber Optic
Isolation

HART

GI/IS Rail I/O

Series H

C200 Controller Architecture 150 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Architecture 7/5/2023
Question 1: C200 Control Strategy Components Honeywell
Which of the following cannot be an integral part of a C200 control strategy?
A) Rack I/O Experion ACE
Server
B) PM I/O FTE

C) Rail I/O Process

Controllers
Rack
I/O
ControlNet I/O Options Series
A
D) Fieldbus Valves
E) PLC I/O using OPC Rail I/O
Series A PM
communications Fiber Optic
I/O

Isolation

HART
GI/IS Rail I/O
Series H
Incorrect.
TheCorrect!
Your correct
answer:PLC
PLCI/O
answerI/Ois:
using
usingOPCOPCcommunications
communications
cannot be an integral part
You must answer the question of a C200 control
before
YouIncorrect
Correct
didYou
not-answered
-answer
Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
strategy.correctly!
to
to continue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C200 Controller Architecture 151 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Architecture 7/5/2023
Question 2: Redundant Components Honeywell
All of these can be redundant except:
Experion ACE
A) C200 processors Server
FTE
B) C200 Fieldbus interface modules C300
Process Rack
Controllers I/O
C) C200 PM I/O link modules ControlNet I/O Options Series
A

D) C200 Rack I/O

Rail I/O
Series A PM
E) C200 PM I/O I/O
Fiber Optic
Isolation

HART
GI/IS Rail I/O
Series H

The
Your correct
answer:
Correct!
Incorrect.
C200answer
C200Rack is:
RackI/OI/O
cannot
cannot
be
YouYou
must
did
beanswer
not answer
the question
redundant.
redundant. this question
before
Incorrect
Correct
You -answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
continuing
completely
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

C200 Controller Architecture 152 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Architecture 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• Key concepts to take away from this lesson are:

– The ACE communicates to the Experion Server over FTE

– The C200 communicates to the Experion Server over Ethernet, FTE or
ControlNet

– C200s and ACE nodes on the same Experion Server can communicate
Peer-to-Peer

– Three main types of I/O:

• PMIO, Rail I/O, and Chassis I/O

C200 Controller Architecture 153 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Architecture 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the C200 Controller Architecture

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

C200 Controller Architecture 154 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Architecture 7/5/2023
 Describe the C200 Controller Racks and
Redundancy

C200 Controller Architecture 155 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson, you will learn how the C200 controller is networked to the
server and remote I/O racks in non-redundant and redundant
configurations

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:

– Describe the C200 control processor, communication and redundancy

modules

– Explain the C200 network connections and addressing

NET OK NET

Honeywell

C200 Controller Architecture 156 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• C200 Hardware
• C200 Network Connections and Addressing

C200 Controller Architecture 157 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Control Processor (CP) Honeywell
• 100MHz Power PC 603E processor with 8 MB RAM

• 4 MB Flash ROM for storing program

• Lithium battery (or optional rechargeable battery extension module)

• Can support up to 8 I/O chassis and 64 IOMs

OK

• Controller can be redundant or non-redundant

2
• Double-wide module -- occupies 2 slots on CP rack

C200 Controller Architecture 158 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
ControlNet Interface (CNI) Honeywell
• Provides the interface to the supervisory network (supervisory CNI)

• Peer-to-peer communication

• I/O communication (downlink CNI)

• One CNI can support up to 24 IOMs

NET

• 4 downlink CNIs can be connected to one controller

• Each CNI must have a unique MAC ID on the same network

C200 Controller Architecture 159 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB) Honeywell

Last two digits of the

Ethernet address
are set here FTEB

FTE

CNI

ControlNet

C200 Controller Architecture 160 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Redundancy Module (RM) Honeywell

• Placed in controller chassis to support redundant controllers

– RM must be in the same position in both racks

– Both RMs are connected by an optical cable

– Switchover between redundant controllers is bumpless

Note: If controller is redundant, then all IOMs must be remote

Redundancy Cable (Fiber Optic)

C200 Controller Architecture 161 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Question 1: C200 Control Processor Honeywell
Which of these statements, about the control processor (CP), is false?
A) It can support up to 8 I/O chassis and 64 IOMs
B) It is a double-wide module that occupies 2 rack slots
OK

C) It can be redundant
2
D) It provides an interface to the supervisory network

Yourcorrect
The answer:answer is:
You
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
mustYou
notanswer
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickthe
anywhere
anywhere
this
question
this
question
correctly!
to
tobefore
continue
continue
completely
continuing
Good
Incorrect.
job! The false statement is "It provides an
interface to the supervisory network." The interface
to the supervisory network is provided by either the
CNI
CNI card
card or
or the
the Fault
Fault Tolerant
Tolerant Ethernet
Ethernet Bridge
Bridge (FTEB).
(FTEB)

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C200 Controller Architecture 162 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• C200 Hardware

• C200 Network Connections and Addressing

C200 Controller Architecture 163 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Non-redundant Controller Honeywell
TC-PRS021 -- C200
TC-CCR013--
Control Processor
ControlNet Interface (Optional) TC-CCR013 --
(CNI), Redundant CNI to connect to other
Media I/O racks TC-FXX102 -- 10-slot rack

TC-FPCXX2-- Controller
120/240 VAC
Power Supply Chassis

I/O modules and LAN Connection

terminal blocks Ethernet, TCPIP, etc.

Taps -- 9904-TPS, R,
YS, and YR (4 kinds)

ControlNet Cable (TC- KCCxxx) -- Supervisory

C
Terminators-- TC-PCIC01 -- ControlNet
o TC-TCXBNC TC-CCR013 -- CNI,
n Communication Interface
Redundant Media
Module for PC (redundant
t
media) (in server)
r
o Server
l (stations not
shown)
N
e
t
Additional
Remote I/O

I/O modules and

terminal blocks

C200 Controller Architecture 164 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Redundant Controller Honeywell
TC-PRS021 -- C200 TC-CCR013 -- CNI to TC-FXX072 – 7-slot rack
Control Processor Redundant Chassis
connect to I/O racks
Identical Configuration
TC-CCR013 -- CNI, TC-PRR021 --
Redundant Media Redundancy Module for module
Module

TC- FXX072
7 SLOT RACK

- --
GN KRRxx1 Redundancy
TC-FPCXX2 -- Cable (Fiber Optic)
120/240 VAC
Power Supply

ControlNet Cable -- I/O Comm

ControlNet Cable (TC -KCCxxx ) -- Supervisory

Terminators -- to
TC-TCXBNC Server
NO IOMs PERMITTED IN CONTROLLER
NO IOMs PERMITTED
CHASSIS IN CONTROLLER
FOR REDUNDANT
CHASSIS FOR REDUNDANT
CONFIGURATION!!
CONFIGURATION!!
(IOLIM and FIM are exceptions)
to IO
Chassis

C200 Controller Architecture 165 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Non-redundant Address Settings Honeywell
03

01
01

CNI
02

Server 04

C200
CNI

CNI
CNI
PCIC

CNI
03

05
C200
CNI

23

CNI
C200 Controller Architecture 166 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Address Settings – Redundant C200 Honeywell
23 01
01 03
05
ServerA

C200

CNI
CNI

CNI

RM
PCIC

CNI
04
01
01
05

CNI
ServerB
C200
CNI

CNI
CNI

RM
PCIC

03
07
C200
CNI

CNI
24

C200 Controller Architecture 167 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
FTEB Honeywell

01 01 03
05
ServerA

C200
FTEB

CNI
CNI

RM

CNI
04
Switch 02
01
05

CNI
ServerB
FTEB
C200

CNI
CNI

RM
03
Switch
07
FTEB
C200

CNI
C200 Controller Architecture 168 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Question 2: MAC Addresses Honeywell
While configuring a ControlNet-connected Control Processor (CP), which
MAC address is entered as the supervisory MAC address?
A) MAC address of the PCIC card
ServerB
B) Device index of the FTEB card
PCIC
C) MAC address of the CNI card connected
to the server
D) MAC address of the CNI card connected
03
to the I/O card
24

C200
CNI
The
Yourcorrect answer is:
answer:
Correct!
You must MAC
Incorrect.
The Theaddress
answer MAC
theaddress
of the of
question CNIthe
card
beforeCNIconnected
card
You
to Correct
You-answer
Incorrect
connected
the -Click
didserver
not answered
to Clickanywhere
should
the this
server
be to
question
this
anywhere
enteredto
should continue
completely
correctly!
continue
as
be the
entered
supervisory
as the
continuing
supervisory
MAC address.
MAC address.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C200 Controller Architecture 169 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When you connect the C200 controller to the server and to remote I/O
racks in non-redundant and redundant configurations, remember:

– The
IOMs
double-wide control processor (CP) supports up to 8 I/O chassis and 64

– ControlNet Interface (CNI) modules provide interfaces to the I/O ControlNet

and the Supervisory ControlNet

– Redundant controllers require all IOMs be configured remotely

– All devices on the same network must have unique MAC addresses
– Redundant
number
supervisory CNI cards must be addressed with the same odd

– Redundant FTEBs must be addressed differently with the primary having an

odd number and the secondary having the next highest even number

C200 Controller Architecture 170 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

C200 Controller Architecture 171 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C200 Controller Architecture 172 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy 7/5/2023
 Describe the C200 I/O Modules

C200 Controller Architecture 173 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn about the standard C200 input/output (I/O)
modules and their applications

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:

– List the standard I/O types that are compatible with the Experion system

– Identify the application for each type of I/O module

Rail I/O
Series A

GI/IS Rail I/O

Series H
PM I/O

C200 Controller Architecture 174 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
Chassis – Series A Input/Output Modules Honeywell
• Compact size – may reside in either the controller rack or remote
I/O rack

– Diagnostic and non-diagnostic modules available

– IOM configurable through Control Builder

– Removable wiring hood

– Can be removed and replaced under power

– All modules have a form factor of 5” X 5”

– Redundancy not supported

C200 Controller Architecture 175 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
Series A Rail I/O Honeywell
• Modular connections – slide rail

• 8 terminal bases can be

connected to a single gateway
Gateway
Terminal Base
• Gateway provides link to the 8 2
7
DIN Rail
ControlNet
3

--
1 2
+ +

• Analog I/O, digital I/O,

thermocouple and RTD

IOM types:
AI- Analog Input
AO- Analog Output
DI- Digital Input
DO- Digital Output

C200 Controller Architecture 176 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
Series H Rail I/O Honeywell
• Galvanically isolated Server

• Intrinsically safe

Supervisory ControlNet
Controller

CNI
Module

I/O ControlNet
Repeater/ Fiber Modules Repeater/ Fiber Modules
Adapter E Contr olNetRepea
x
A
te
rdapter E
x Contr olNet
Fiber Mod
ul e
E
x Contr olNet
Fiber Mod
ul e
Adapter E Contr olNetRepea
x
tAe
rdapter E
xContr olNetFiber Mod
ul e
E
xContr olNFi
etber Mod
ul e
TC-PBFO01 TC-PMFO01 TC-PMFO01 TC-PBFO01 TC-PMFO01 TC-PMFO01

COM MOD PWR

Cha
n1 Cha
n2 Cha
n1 Cha
n2
COM MOD PWR

Cha
n1Cha
n2 Cha
n1 Cha
n2
Non-
1 2 3 4
+V-V+V-V
Recv Xmit Recv Xmit Recv Xmit Recv Xmit
1 2 3 4
+V-V+V-V
Recv Xmit Recv Xmit Recv Xmit Recv Xmit Hazardous
Area
Fiber
Hazardous
E E
Contr olNetRepea
A
te
rdapter Ex Contr olNet
Fiber Mod
ul e ExContr olNetFiber Mod
ul e Contr olNetRepea
tAe
rdapter ExContr olNetFiber Mod
ul e ExContr olNet
Fiber Mod
ul e
TC-PBFO01 TC-PMFO01 TC-PMFO01 TC-PBFO01 TC-PMFO01 TC-PMFO01

COM MOD PWR

Optic COM MOD PWR

Area
Cable
Cha
n1 Cha
n2 Cha
n1Cha
n2
Cha
n1Cha
n2 Cha
n1 Cha
n2

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
+V-V+V-V Recv Xmit Recv Xmit Recv Xmit
+V-V+V-V Recv Xmit Recv Xmit Recv Xmit
Recv Xmit Recv Xmit

Rail I/O Modules - Series H

Ex
TC-PGCN11

Gateway
I/O ControlNet --
12
++

1 2 4
V+V- V+V-
A B

C200 Controller Architecture 177 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
Process Manager I/O (PM I/O) Honeywell
• PM I/O Link Interface Module in C200
controller chassis

• Redundancy of PM IOLIM as part of C200

redundancy

• PM I/O can be redundant

• PM I/O includes AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C,

DI SOE

• FTA for I/O

• Remote I/O using fiber optic PM I/O

C200 Controller Architecture 178 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
Serial Interface Module Honeywell

NET OK NET

Serial Interface Processor

Honeywel
l SIM FTA
Power Adapter
ADAPTER

SERIAL SERIAL
INTERFACE INTERFACE
FTA FTA
MODBUS A/B
(16 Array (16 Array
Channels) Channels)

Modbus Allen-Bradley
Compatible Compatible
Subsystem Subsystem

C200 Controller Architecture 179 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
Question 1: I/O Application Honeywell
Which I/O module can be used in a hazardous environment?

A) Chassis I/O
NET OK NET

B) Serial Interface

C) Series H I/O
Honeywell

Rail I/O Modules - Series H

E x

TC-PGCN11

Gateway --
1 2
+ +

1 2 4

V+V- V+V-
A B

The correct
Your answer:answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! Series
Series
You must answer HHI/O
I/O modules
modules
the questionare
arespecifically
specifically
before
Correct
You Incorrect
did You - -Click
not answer
answered
designed Click
for anywhere
this
anywhere
this
unsafe totocontinue
question
correctly!
completely
continue
environments.
continuing

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C200 Controller Architecture 180 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
Question 2: I/O Redundancy Honeywell
Which I/O module will support redundancy?
NET
A) Chassis I/O OK NET

B) PM I/O
Honeywell

C) Series H I/O
Rail I/O Modules - Series H
E x

TC-PGCN11

Gateway --
1 2
+ +

1 2 4

V+V- V+V-
A B

PM I/O
Yourcorrect
The answer: answer is:
You must- Click
Correct answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Yes!
No. did
PMYou
PM not
I/O Clickanywhere
I/Oanswer
answered
-modules
modulesanywhere
this
this
are
are the
the to
question
tocontinue
correctly!
continue
only
onlycompletely
standard
standard
continuing
I/O modules that are available in a redundant
configuration.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C200 Controller Architecture 181 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• The standard I/O types compatible with the Experion system are:

– Chassis Series A I/O modules that can be installed in the same chassis as
 the C200 or a remote I/O chassis

– Series A Rail I/O modules, which include analog I/O, digital I/O,
 thermocouple, and RTD

• Rail I/O gateway provides a link to the ControlNet

– Series H Rail I/O modules, which are intrinsically safe for use in hazardous
 environments

– PM I/O modules which include AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C, and DI SOE
– Serial Interface modules which interface to Allen-Bradley and Modbus
 subsystems
C200 Controller Architecture 182 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the C200 I/O Modules

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

C200 Controller Architecture 183 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C200 Controller Architecture 184 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 I/O Modules 7/5/2023
 HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 185 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• HMIWeb Display Builder is used to build Experion PKS displays

• At the conclusion of this lesson,

you will know how to:

– Set up search paths for

Station to locate the displays
you create

– Start HMIWeb Display

Builder and customize its
toolbars

– Create displays, shapes and

Display objects
paths

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 186 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Working with Display Builder


• Creating displays, shapes and objects

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 187 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Display Builder Applications Honeywell

• HMIWeb Display Builder:

– Creates custom display pages on an Experion system
– Creates files in .htm format that can be viewed in Station or via Internet
Explorer using eServer
• .dsp Display Builder:
– Supports users who have earlier versions of Experion displays
– Customizes the standard .dsp system pages provided with an Experion
system

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 188 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Display Search Paths Honeywell
• Each Station’s set-up must
include search paths to display
files
• Otherwise, when requesting a
display or page, a message will
appear in the Station Message
Zone:
“The display file filename was not
found.”

• Search paths are defined in

Station by selecting:
Station →
Connection Properties… →
Displays tab

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 189 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Display Search Paths Honeywell

• Paths are searched in the

order listed
• Use the arrow keys to reorder
paths
• List display and “linked” shape
paths separately
• Path for:
– Custom graphics: C:\Program
Files\ Honeywell\ Experion
PKS\ Client\Abstract

– System displays: C:\Program

Files\ Honeywell\ Experion
PKS\ Client\System\ Rxxx,
where xxx is the product
Check to “Search subdirectories for release number
shapes” (slows display load time)

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 190 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Starting HMIWeb Display Builder Honeywell
• To open HMIWeb Display Builder
– Start → Programs → Honeywell Experion PKS → Server → HMIWeb
Display Builder (From Server)
– Start → Programs → Honeywell Experion PKS → Console Station →
HMIWeb Display Builder (From Console Station)
– Start → Programs → Honeywell Experion PKS → Client Software →
HMIWeb Display Builder (From Flex Station/Console Extension Station)

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 191 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Starting HMIWeb Display Builder Honeywell
• To open Configuration Studio, select:
– Start → Programs → Honeywell Experion PKS → Configuration Studio
• In Configuration Studio, select:
– Displays → Create a New Normal Display

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 192 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
HMIWeb Display Builder Main Window Honeywell

Menu bar

Toolbar

Object
Explorer

Point Display/Drawing
Browser Window

Toolbar

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 193 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
HMIWeb Display Builder Main Window Honeywell

Display filename
Click to show or hide
Object Explorer and Point
Browser

Object
Explorer

Point
Browser

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 194 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Toolbars Honeywell

• To display or hide a toolbar:

– Select Tools > Customize…

– Click the box next to the toolbar to insert a checkmark and display the
toolbar
– Click again to remove the checkmark and hide the toolbar

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 195 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Toolbars Honeywell

• To create a custom toolbar:

– Click New

– Give the new toolbar a

meaningful name

– Add icons to it from the

Command tab

• To undo changes to a system-

provided toolbar, click the
Reset button

• When selecting a user-created

toolbar, the Reset button
changes to Delete

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 196 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Toolbars Honeywell

Move Handle on
docked toolbar

Title bar on
floating toolbar

• To move a toolbar to a convenient location:

– Click the move handle on a docked toolbar or the title bar on a floating
toolbar
– Drag the toolbar to the new location

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 197 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Working with Display Builder

• Creating displays, shapes and objects

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 198 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Displays and Shapes Honeywell
• These are two methods to create new displays and shapes

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 199 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Displays and Shapes Honeywell
• Display is a standard operating display
– The full-screen default size is 1020 x 589
– Does not have scroll bars when called up in Station
– Saves with the file extension .htm
• Popup is a secondary window display
– Appears when a user clicks an object to which it is attached
– Provides a way to control point parameters
– Similar to a faceplate
– The default size is 300 x 300
– Saves with the file extension .htm

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 200 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Displays and Shapes Honeywell
• Shape Sequence is a user-built object
– Inserted into standard displays
– Used for status indication or animation
– Should not include dynamic objects such as alphanumerics and charts linked
to database items
– Arranges shapes, from left to right, in the appropriate order
– In the case of a status indicator, use the first shape to represent a "bad value"
– Saves with the file extension .sha

Shape
Sequence

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 201 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Displays and Shapes Honeywell
• Dynamic Shape is a user-built shape
– Inserted into standard displays
– Uses custom properties to link to the appropriate points or parameters in the
database
– Saves with the file extension .sha

Dynamic Shape

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 202 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Display Templates Honeywell
• A template:
– Is a standard “starter” display
– Makes it easier to create new graphics and keep them visually consistent
• These are two methods to create display templates

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 203 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Display Templates Honeywell
• Templates are stored at C:\Program Files\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\client\ HMIWeb Display Builder\Templates
• The folder contains two Experion PKS templates
– A default Normal Display blank template
– A blank Point Detail template to create custom point detail displays for
specialized point types

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 204 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Objects Honeywell
• To create a regularly-shaped object such as a rectangle or pushbutton:
– Select the appropriate object-creation button
– Drag the pointer diagonally over the display and release the mouse button
when the dotted “outline rectangle” is the correct size and shape
• Rename the object based on its function
– txtFIC101 for a text object
– spFIC101 for an alphanumeric setpoint value

Outline

Object
names

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 205 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Objects Honeywell
• To create an irregularly-shaped object made of straight lines:
– Select the polyline or polygon tool
• Click locations to mark each node or segment, except for the last
• Double-click to mark the last node
– Completes an “open” polyline
– Completes and closes a polygon

Closed Polygon

Open Polygon

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 206 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Objects Honeywell
• To create a text object:
– Select the textbox tool
– Drag the pointer diagonally over the display and release the mouse button
when the dotted “outline rectangle” is the correct size and shape
– Delete “Text” and type your text
– Start a new line or paragraph by pressing Enter

Text Object

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 207 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Objects Honeywell
• To create a hyperlink:
– Select the hyperlink tool
– Drag the pointer diagonally over the display and release the mouse button
when the dotted “outline rectangle” is the correct size and shape
– Delete “Text” and type a suitable name for the link
– With the object still selected, open the Properties window and select the
Details tab
– Specify the link’s target, either a Web page or another display

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 208 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Objects Honeywell
• To create a trend object:
– Select the trend/chart tool
– Drag the pointer diagonally over the display and release the mouse button
when the dotted “outline rectangle” is the correct size and shape of the trend
being created

Trend
Object

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 209 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Creating Objects Honeywell
• To modify trend object properties:
– Configure points and parameters in the Plots tab
– Configure the chart appearance in the Time Period and View tab

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 210 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Duplicating Objects Honeywell
• A duplicated object is identical to the original except for its name and
position
• When an object is copied or duplicated, the object’s scripts are also
duplicated
– References to the original object are changed to the new object
– Carefully check all duplicated scripts
Duplicate Tool

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 211 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Duplicating Objects Honeywell
• To make duplicate copies of objects, select the object and do any of
these:
– Click the Duplicating tool
– Press Ctrl + C (copy) and Ctrl + V (paste)
– Press Ctrl + D (duplicate)
– Right-click the object and select Duplicate from the menu

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 212 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When you build displays, shapes and objects, remember that you:

– Can set up search paths for Station to locate the displays, in Station →
Connection Properties → Displays tab

– Can customize the main window of Display Builder by showing or hiding the
Object Explorer, displaying only the toolbars you use frequently, moving
toolbars to convenient locations and creating custom toolbars

– Can modify the Experion PKS display template to help keep your displays
visually consistent

– Select File → New to create displays, popups, shape sequences and

dynamic shapes (or use the display icon) and use the toolbar buttons to
create standard objects

– Should always rename the objects you create based on their functions

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 213 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe HMIWeb Display Builder Functions – Basics

Part 1

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 214 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Basics 7/5/2023
 HMIWeb Display Builder Functions -
Properties and Shapes

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 215 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will know how to:
– View and edit the properties of a selected display, shape or object
– Insert shapes in displays
Shape Library

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 216 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Display, shapes and object properties


• Inserting shapes in displays

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 217 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Properties Window Honeywell

• Use the Properties Window to

view and edit the properties of an
object
– A selected object
• Physical attributes, such as
color and size
• Database link details
– When no object is selected, you
can edit the display’s properties
• The tabs in the Properties
Window are based on object
type

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 218 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Properties Window Honeywell
• In this illustration, an alphanumeric object is created and selected
• To open its Properties window, use any of the following methods:
– Double-click the object
– Right-click the object and select Edit Properties
– Click the Properties button on the Toolbar
Properties
– Use the View > pull-down menu button

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 219 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Properties Window Honeywell
• If you select several objects of Two Alphanumeric
the same type and edit a objects selected
property they possess, all
selected objects change
• The selected object changes
automatically when you change
the property’s value

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 220 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
General Tab Honeywell
• Name - useful for Object
Explorer listings and
when referring to an
object in scripts

• ToolTip - text that

appears when a user
hovers the mouse
pointer over the object

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 221 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
General Tab Honeywell
• Style - object's position
and size, expressed in
pixels

• Rotation - specifies the

clockwise angle by
which the object is
rotated

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 222 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
General Tab Honeywell
• Visibility values are:
– Hidden - the object is
always hidden
– Visible - the object is
always visible
– Inherit - the object’s
visibility is governed
by its parent

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 223 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
General Tab Honeywell
• Style - select a Cascade
Style Sheet to manage
this object’s
characteristics

• Enable tab stop - allows

you to select the object by
pressing Tab

• Tab index - the integer

number you type to specify
the order in which objects
are selected

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 224 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Behaviors Tab Honeywell
• Faceplate - a specialized type of
popup
– Standard system faceplates
C:\Program Files\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\Client\System\
R300

• Uses the point information from

an object’s Data tab for access
to parameter values

• Station can display up to four

faceplates simultaneously

Faceplate

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 225 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Behaviors Tab Honeywell
• Hover - for alphanumerics and
comboboxes
– If the object is too narrow to show
its contents, the contents appear
in a ToolTip when a user moves
the mouse pointer over the object

• Pop-up - a secondary window

that appears when a user clicks
the object to which it is attached

Popup

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 226 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Behaviors Tab Honeywell

• Script Data - adds a Script tab to

enable a data connection to point
parameter values in scripting

• Shape Sequence Animation -

available if using a shape
sequence

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 227 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Data Tab Honeywell
• The Data tab specifies the object's link to the database

• Type of database link specifies the

type of data being accessed:
– Point/Parameter links the object to
a point parameter
– Database file links the object to a
file in the Server database

• Data entry allowed indicates:

– Users with a security level equal
or higher than the specified level
can edit the object’s value

• Update rate indicates:

– The frequency with which a
parameter value is updated

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 228 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Details Tab Honeywell
• The Details tab contains
properties that are specific to the
object

• Display as - specifies how the

value is displayed
– Numeric for alphanumerics
– State descriptor for status points
or device control

• Floating decimal point - if

deselected, you must specify the
number of decimals to display

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 229 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Details Tab Honeywell

• Number of characters displayed

• Word wrap - if selected, the value

is displayed over several lines

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 230 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Animation Tab Honeywell
• The Animation tab specifies the
correspondence between the
object's color and the value or
status of the associated point
and parameter

• Color Breakpoints - the type of

animation used for the object
– None - no animation
– Discrete - each color represents
a discrete value
– Continuous - the color changes
based on the % defined

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 231 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Animation Tab Honeywell
• Indicate alarm state with color
– Station overrides the current
color with the appropriate
system defined color when the
associated point is in alarm.

• Indicate off-scan state with color

– Station overrides the current
color with the system defined
color for off-scan when the
scanning for the associated point
has been disabled.

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 232 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Animation tab Honeywell
• Indicate bad value with color
– Station overrides the current
color to indicate bad value such
as a bad quality, OOS, or a lost
value. The bad state color can
be defined in the station.ini file.

• Indicate NaN with color

– Station overrides the current
color with the system-defined
colors to indicate the bound
data's NaN quality state. The
NaN state color can be defined
in the station.ini file.

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 233 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Shortcut Menu Tab Honeywell

• A shortcut menu appears when

you right-click an object or the
display

• The default/standard shortcut

menu assigned to an object is
determined by the type of point
to which it is linked

• The standard shortcut menus are

Display- stored in Program Files\
level Honeywell\Experion PKS\
shortcut Client\System\Rxxx, where xxx is
menu
the release number

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 234 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Shortcut Menu Tab Honeywell

• To assign a user-created
shortcut menu to an object,
select Customized shortcut menu
C:\ProgramFiles\Honeywell\ Experion PKS\Clie
and browse to the file

Customized
Shortcut Menu

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 235 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Colors, Lines and Font Tabs Honeywell
• The Colors tab controls the
object's colors

• The Lines tab controls the

object’s line thickness and style

• The Font tab controls the

appearance of text

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 236 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Script Data Tab Honeywell
• The Script Data tab lists point
parameters that can be
accessed by scripts
• Adding a point parameter to
one object:
– Makes it accessible to all
scripts in the display
– Adds a corresponding set of
point related properties to the
object
• See Properties of the Point
on a Script Data Tab in
Knowledge Builder for
additional information

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 237 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Object Explorer Honeywell
Stacking • The Object Explorer:
Order
– Is useful for managing and
Object editing objects
Explorer
Icon – Shows all objects in the
current display and their
interrelationships

• To show or hide objects within

a group, click the “+” or “-”
Alphabetical
Order
• To sort objects:
– In alphabetical order, click the
Alphabetical Order button

– In their stacking order, click

the Stacking Order button

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 238 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Object Explorer Honeywell
• To change the stacking order,
click:
– Bring to front
– Send to back
– Bring forward
– Send backward

• Double-click an object in the

Object Explorer to call up the
Properties Window
Context
menu • Right-click to see the Context
Menu
• Edit the properties for more
than one object by using the
<Ctrl> or the <Shift> key to
select multiple objects
HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 239 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Point Browser Honeywell

• The Point Browser

Point Browser displays every point that
Icon
has been defined on the
server to which you are
11_AC12

connected

• Double-click a point
name in the Point
Browser to link the point
to the object.

• Or drag and drop the

point in the data tab.

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 240 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Point Browser Honeywell
• Filter the list of points:
Click Show Filter. The enterprise model appears. Click
the appropriate entity in the model. The point list changes
to show only those points that belong to that asset entity.

• Remove the filter:

Click Clear Filter

• Connect to a different server:

– Click the Change button. Select
the server from the list of servers
and click OK. To confirm the
change of servers, click Apply.

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 241 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Display, shapes and object properties


• Inserting shapes in displays

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 242 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Shape Gallery Honeywell
Shape Gallery

• Select View > Shape Gallery or click the Shape Gallery button on the
toolbar to go to the library
– Stored in c:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\
HMIWeb Display Builder\ShapeLib\...

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 243 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Previewing Shapes in the Shape Gallery Honeywell

Preview Show Shape • To preview shape

Sequence
sequences:
– Select a folder in the left-
hand pane to see a one-
line summary of each file in
the right-hand pane

Shape – Click the Preview button

Sequence to see the shapes in the
files

– Double-click the shape

sequence, or select it and
click the Show Shape
Sequence button for
runtime animation

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 244 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Inserting a Shape from the Shape Gallery Honeywell
• To insert a shape into a
display from the Shape
Gallery:
– Drag the name of the
object from the library
listing and drop it in your
display
– Or right-click the shape,
select Insert into Display

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 245 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Inserting a Shape Honeywell
• To insert a shape into a display from Display Builder:
– Click the Insert Shape button and drag your cursor diagonally to mark the
rectangle where you want to insert the shape
– Select the shape to be inserted from the Insert Shape dialog box that
appears
Insert Shape

Outline for shape

insertion

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 246 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Modifying Shape Sequence Properties Honeywell
• Modify the Properties of the inserted shape
• For the pump shape sequence inserted in a display:
– The Behaviors tab has a checkmark next to Shape Sequence Animation
– The Data tab lists the database link - the point and parameter with which
the shape sequence is associated
– The Animation tab indicates the number of shapes being used from the
shape sequence

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 247 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Modifying Dynamic Shape Properties Honeywell
Dynamic Shape • Custom Properties are created when a
dynamic shape is built
– This shape has generic custom properties
to represent the indicator (Level) and the
chart (Temperature)

• The point parameters for Level and

Temperature (database links) are
entered from Custom Properties tab
when the shape is inserted in a display
Enter Parameter
Tagname

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 248 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When using HMIWeb Display Builder:

– You can edit the properties of a selected object or the display (if no object is
selected)

– You can select several objects and edit their common properties at one time
– The Shape Gallery contains a library of pre-built shapes accessible from
View > Shape Gallery

– You
need
can use only the number of shapes from a shape sequence that you

– Create generic custom properties for dynamic shapes and link to database
point/parameters when inserted into a display

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 249 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe HMIWeb Display Builder Functions –

Object Properties and Shapes

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 250 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Properties and Shapes 7/5/2023
 HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options
and LRNs

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 251 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will know how to:
– Change the Display Builder interface selections in the Tools > Options tabs
– Work with the Script Editor

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 252 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Tools > Options


• Logical resource numbers, scripts and saving your work

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 253 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Tools > Options - General Tab Honeywell
• The Tools > Options General tab
contains a variety of functions:

– Default scripting language:

specify VBScript or JScript

– Number of Undo/Redo Levels

– Recently used file list

– Save AutoRecover info every: an

auto recover version of an open
display is saved at the specified
frequency

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 254 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Tools > Options - General Tab Honeywell

• Change mouse cursor when

over a selected object
– The mouse pointer changes
when over a
selectable/editable object at
buildtime

• Show Intellisense auto-

completion list in script editor
– Activates the Script Editor
Intellisense feature which
displays information in lists
and popups as you write a
script

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 255 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Tools > Options - General Tab Honeywell

• Archive file format:

– Use the default file format
(Text) when saving a display in
archive format unless you
have a specific need to use
binary

• Save unarchived copy of file

with archive files
– If selected, two versions of a
display are saved each time
you save it in archive format
• Archive (*.hda or *.hsa)
• Standard (*.htm or *.sha)

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 256 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Tools > Options - Grid and Rulers Tab Honeywell

• The Grid and Rulers tab

allows you to:
– Select the horizontal and
vertical spacing of gridlines
– Select the color of the
gridlines
– Snap objects to grid --
objects automatically align
to the grid when you
create, move or resize
them
– Show the grid
– Show rulers
Show rulers

Show grid

Snap to grid

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 257 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Tools > Options - Shapes Tab Honeywell
• The Shapes tab allows you to:
– Search for shape files - this list
specifies the folder Display
Builder searches when looking
for embedded and linked shapes

– By default, insert into display -

specifies the default manner in
which shapes are inserted into
displays

• Contents of a shape file

embeds a copy of the
shape in the display
• Link to shape file inserts a
link to the shape file

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 258 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Tools > Options


• Logical resource numbers, scripts and saving your work

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 259 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Logical Resource Numbers (LRNs) Honeywell
• LRN 21 is a common Server Display program and the default task option
for a pushbutton

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 260 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Using LRNs Honeywell
• When requesting a task, specify
the LRN assigned to the task
– LRN 21 performs a wide range
of tasks, which are determined
by the values entered in the
Parameters
• For example, to call a trend
display, Parameter 1 is 8

• Parameter 2 is the trend

number defined when the
trend is built

• See Knowledge Builder- Server

Display Program for a list of
parameter values

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 261 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Displays and Scripts Honeywell
• HMIWeb displays are customized Dynamic HTML (DHTML) pages that
are based on this Web-standard Document Object Model (DOM)
Object All of the items in a display page are known as Objects. These
can include lines, rectangles, pipes, and values. If a number of
Objects are Grouped then that Group is also an Object.

Property Each Object is defined by its Properties. These Properties can

include its name, line and fill colors, size, position, visibility, and
so on.

Method Methods are equivalent to the terms “function” or “command.”

Scripts are one, or a number of Methods that, when activated,
perform the desired function(s). For example, the Page object
has a Redraw method, which redraws the current page being
displayed by Station.

Event Each object has a number of Events associated with it. Scripts
are associated with Events and are activated when that Event
occurs. Events include OnClick, OnMouseEnter, OnMouseLeave,
OnUpdate, OnFocus, etc.

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 262 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Access the Script Editor Honeywell
• To write script, open the Script Editor with one of these actions:
– Right-click an object and select Edit Script from the menu
– Select an object, then select View > Script Editor
– Select an object, then click the Script Editor button Script Editor

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 263 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Script Editor Honeywell
• The Script Editor is used to write scripts for objects and for the display
– The basic syntax of your script is checked when you select another object or
event or close the script window
– Your script is saved to memory as soon as you select another object or
event or close the script window
– Scripts or changes are saved to disk when you save the display

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 264 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Saving Your Work Honeywell

• Save your display by selecting

File > Save or Save As

• HMIWeb Display Builder will

Save add the extension .htm to the
filename

• Generally, custom graphics

reside under the following path:

– C:\Program Files\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\Client\Abstract

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 265 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Saving Your Work Honeywell
• When an HMIWeb display is saved, a folder that contains various
support/binding files and graphics is created
• These folders have the same name as the display, but with a "_files"
extension
• If an .htm display is copied, the supporting files are automatically copied
along with the display

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 266 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Additional Information Honeywell
• Details on how to use all the standard functions within HMIWeb Display
Builder can be found in Online Help by selecting: Help > Help Topics
• For additional information, refer to Knowledge Builder >Experion
R300.0 >Configuration >HMIWeb Display Building Guide

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 267 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When building displays, shapes and objects with Display Builder,
remember:

– To indicate the location of folders that contain shapes to be embedded in or

linked to a display in the Tools > Options Shapes tab

– To embed shapes in displays because it optimizes display performance

– Refer to Knowledge Builder Server Display Programs for a list of Logical
Resource Numbers (LRNs)

– Use the Script Editor to write scripts in VBScript or JScript

– When you copy an HMIWeb display, the folder that contains various
support/binding files and graphics with the "_files" extension is copied, too

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 268 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe HMIWeb Display Builder Functions –

Options and LRNs

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 269 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions 270 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Functions - Options and LRNs 7/5/2023
 Describe the Main Features of the Series C
System

C300 Controller Architecture 271 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Series C Deliverables
• Key features of Series C hardware
• R300 performance targets

C300 Controller Architecture 272 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
R300 Series C Deliverables Honeywell
• Products and Functions delivered under
the Series C Umbrella:
– Includes
• Series C I/O
• Series C FIM
• C300
• Control Firewall
• Related Deliverables:
– Includes
• New FTE Bridge firmware that supports
C300 to selected Series A I/O
– Allow FTE Bridge firmware to be
upgraded from a R300 system

C300 Controller Architecture 273 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
R300 Series C Deliverables, contd. Honeywell
• Products delivered in R300 Series C
Release
– C300 Controller
– HART (HLAI) Analog Input
– HART Analog Output
– Discrete Input
– Discrete Output
– Low Level Mux Input
– Fieldbus Interface Module (FIM)
– Control Firewall
– Power System

C300 Controller Architecture 274 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Question 1: Series C Deliverables Honeywell
Which of these statements about the Series C deliverables is false?

A) It includes Series C I/O, C300, Series C FIM and

Control Firewall
B) It includes a new Power System
C) New FTE Bridge firmware is required but cannot
be upgraded from a R300 system

Correct!
The
YourIncorrect.
The
correct
answer: false
The false
answer statement
is: statementis " New
is " New
FTE Bridge
FTE
firmware
Bridge firmware
is required is required
but it cannot
but itbecannot
upgraded
be
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
upgradedClickanywhere
from aanywhere
this
from this
R300question
correctly!
a R300totocontinue
system."continue
completely
system."
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 275 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Series C Deliverables

• Key features of Series C hardware

• R300 performance targets

C300 Controller Architecture 276 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Packaging - Overview Honeywell
• “Series C” term is for the new styling for family
of Controller and I/O
• Space-efficient design
– “Designed Vertical”
– No electronic card files
– “Zero Footprint” power system does not impact
module space
– >30% reductions compared to equivalent HPM
• Combines I/O Processor and Field Terminations
into one Assembly
– Fewer components providing higher MTBF
and Availability

C300 Controller Architecture 277 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Key Attributes Honeywell
• Environmental ratings equivalent to HPM
– Temperature, corrosives, EMI/RFI, Vibration, other equal to HPM
– Class 1 Div 2/Zone 2 interface & mounting support
• Approvals Support (CE, FM, CSA, ATEX, and so on)
– No plans for UL certification of complete system
• Corrosion protected models
• All Series C components can be mixed and matched in cabinet
• Electronics mounted to IOTA
– Module Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
– Reduces footprint
• Packaged cabinet solution
– Similar to TPS Process Manager today

C300 Controller Architecture 278 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Key Attributes, contd. Honeywell
• “Designed Vertical”
– More Uniform Heat Management
• Reduces “hot spots”
– More Efficient Field Wiring
• Top/Bottom Wiring Entry
• More Natural Terminations
• No Severe Wire Bends
• Space Efficient Design
– Comparable to highest density current
competitive offerings
• Modular Approach
– Removable Terminal Blocks
– Integral Shields Termination

C300 Controller Architecture 279 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Mechanical Keying Honeywell
• Modules will have “Key” to prevent insertion into
invalid IOTA
Keys
• Intended to prevent inadvertent insertion
of Module
– “Average” Use

Key Slots

C300 Controller Architecture 280 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
New Terminology Honeywell

IOTA Support

IOTA Carrier

IOTA (Input/Output
Termination Assembly)

IOM (Input/Output Module)

C300 Controller Architecture 281 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
I/O Options for C300 Honeywell
• Series C I/O
– New form Factor
– AI, AO, DI, DO, LLMUX

• Series C Fieldbus Interface

• PMIO
– As supported by C200

• FTEB connected Series A I/O

– Serial Interface, Profibus
Interface, DeviceNet Interface,
and Pulse Input
– NOT regular chassis I/O

• FTEB connections to AB PLCs

– Using a bridge chassis with a
FTEB and downlink CNI

C300 Controller Architecture 282 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Main Components Honeywell
• Mounting concept:
– Single cabinet side for electronics
and terminations
– Cable tray mounted carrier/IOTA with:
• Replaceable Module
• Power and Communication
Connectors
• Field Wiring Connections
• Vertical stacking of elements
– Natural flow of field wiring
• Channel mount
– Channel is like PM FTA channel
– Channel is not the same as FTA and
cannot be used for Series C mounting

C300 Controller Architecture 283 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
New Cabinet Design Honeywell

Power
Supply
Area

I/O Rail
Area

Batteries/
Battery
Charger

C300 Controller Architecture 284 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Question 2: Packaging Honeywell
Why is Series C a more space efficient design?
A) Designed Vertical
B) No electronic card files
C) Power system does not occupy footprint
D) All of the above

The
Your correct
answer:
Incorrect!
Correct! answer
All
All of theis:
ofthe above
abovestatements
statementsarearetrue
trueand
and
make
You Series
must C a more
answer space efficient
the question before design.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 285 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Question 3: Terminology Honeywell
Which of the following is not a Series C hardware terminology?

A) IOTA Support
B) IOTA Carrier
C) IOTA
D) IOM
E) CPM

Incorrect.
Correct! The
Theterm
term"CPM"
"CPM"isisnot
notaaSeries
SeriesCC
The correct
Your answer: answer is:
hardware terminology and is used when
You must answer
referring athe question
toanywhere
C200 before
controller.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 286 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Series C Deliverables

• Key features of Series C hardware

• R300 performance targets

C300 Controller Architecture 287 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
R300 Performance “Targets” Honeywell

FEATURE R210 R300

Fault-Tolerant Ethernet
1
FTE Nodes per Community 200 330 (200)
Non-FTE Nodes per Community 200 200
ACE
No. ACE per Server 5 5
Controller
No. Controllers per Server (C200 or C300) 10 16
Latency Analog 250 ms
Digital 100 ms

1: 330 nodes per community if no FTEBs are present; 200 nodes per community with FTEBs.

C300 Controller Architecture 288 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Limitations Honeywell
• The following is not supported with C300:
– Peer-to-Peer communications with FTEB-based IOLIMs
– Series C I/O and PM I/O cannot be mixed on the same I/O Link
• The following will not be tested and therefore not supported in R300:
– C200 Peer-to-Peer communications with Series C FIM modules
– C300 Peer-to-Peer communications with FTEB-based (Series A)
FIM modules

C300 Controller Architecture 289 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Question 4: Rules Honeywell
Which of the following statements is true about the Series C system?
A) Peer-to-peer communication with FTEB based
IOLIMs is not supported
B) Series C I/O and PM I/O cannot be mixed on the
same I/O Link
C) C200 Peer-to-peer communications with Series C
FIM modules is not supported
D) C300 Peer-to-peer communications with FTEB-
based (Series A) FIM modules is not supported
E) All of the above

The
Your correct
answer:
Incorrect.
Correct! answer
All
All of theis:
ofthe above
abovestatements
statements
areYou must
true aboutanswer the question
the Series before
C system.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 290 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell

• Series C hardware includes

– Series C I/O (HART AI, AO, DI, DO, LLMUX)
– Series C FIM
– C300 Controller
– Control Firewall
• Series C is a space efficient design that combines I/O processor and
field termination into one assembly
• Series C electronics are mounted to IOTAs reducing footprint and
supporting module removal and insertion under power (RIUP)
• C300 controller supports Series C, Series A, and PM I/O, Series C
Fieldbus interface and FTEB connections to AB PLCs via Downlink CNI
• 16 C300 controllers are supported per server
• C300 Peer-to-Peer communications with FTEB-based IOLIMs is not
supported
• Series C and PM I/O cannot be mixed on the same I/O link
C300 Controller Architecture 291 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the main features of the Series C system

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

C300 Controller Architecture 292 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Main Features of the Series C System 7/5/2023
 Describe the Architecture of Series C System

C300 Controller Architecture 293 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Architecture of Series C System 7/5/2023
Experion Platform Architecture Honeywell
Advanced Enterprise Wide Plant Wide Casual User Desktop Integrated
Applications Data Secure Read Only Access Physical
Business FLEX Warehouse Process Display for Business Security
Workcenter PHD Web Server Applications Enterprise
POMS, OptiVISION eServer Web Browsers Building
Integrator
Firewall Business Network
Plant Asset Remote Operations Multivariable Control Video as a Process Sensor
Plant Simulation
Management Experion Station and Optimization Digital Video Manager
UniSim
Asset Manager Profit Suite

Video Ethernet

Advanced Applications Network

Redundant Precision Measurement
Integrated
Web-based Human Interface Global Database & Historian and Control
Supervisory Control
Experion Station Experion Server Quality Control System
ACE
ASM Operator Effectiveness

Ergonomic
Focus of this Presentation Operator Consoles
Icon Series
Supervisory Control Network
Regulatory, Logic Local Control Network
Wireless Sequential & Model
Access Based Controls
C300/C200 & Profit Loop

Redundant and/or SIL 3 Safety System

Field Rounds Safety Manager
Remote I/O
Automation Process Basic
Field Mobility IntelaTrac PKS Manager Controller
Wireless Investment Protection
Mobile PKS
Transmitters for TPS/TDC
Experion on LCN

C300 Controller Architecture 294 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Architecture of Series C System 7/5/2023
Series C Architecture Honeywell

C300 Controller Architecture 295 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Architecture of Series C System 7/5/2023
Question 1: Architecture Honeywell
Which of the following statements is not true about the Series C Architecture?
A) Series C FIM is connected to L1 or L2 switch
B) Serial Interface, Pulse Input, Device Net Interface,
and Profibus Interface Series A I/Os are connected
to Control Firewall using FTEB

C) Allen Bradely PLCs can also be connected to a rack,

and then to the Control Firewall using an FTEB
D) All of the above

Incorrect.
Correct! The
Thefalse
falsestatement
statementisis""Series
SeriesCCFIM
FIMisis
connected to L1 or L2 Cisco switch". The Series C
Yourcorrect
The answer:answer is:
FIM is the Fieldbus interface module which
You must answer the question before
connects
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You to
not -answertheanywhere
answered
-Click
Click Control
anywhere
this
this Firewall
question
correctly!
to via FTE.
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 296 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Architecture of Series C System 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell

• Control Firewalls are connected to Level 1 or Level 2 switches

• The C300 Controller is connected to the Control Firewall using FTE
• The Series C FIM is the Fieldbus interface. This module also connects
to the Control Firewall via FTE

• Series A Rack IO connects to the C300 through the Control Firewall

using an FTEB
– This IO is currently limited to Serial Interface, Pulse Input, DeviceNet
Interface and Profibus Interface modules only. This rack is connected to the
Control Firewall using an FTEB and via FTE

• Allen Bradley PLCs can also be connected to a Rack and then to the
Control Firewall using an FTEB

C300 Controller Architecture 297 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Architecture of Series C System 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the Architecture of Series C System

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

C300 Controller Architecture 298 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Architecture of Series C System 7/5/2023
 Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and
Options

C300 Controller Architecture 299 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
C300 Controller Supported I/O Honeywell
• Flexible I/O support: IOL
Connection
– Adaptable to fit range of I/O interface
requirements mix and match
– Can be any mix of
• PMIO
• Series C I/O
• Series A Chassis I/O (supported modules
only) through FTE Bridge module
• FIMs
– 64 primary I/O units per C300
– Support 2 on board IOLINK interfaces
• Each IOL can support 40 I/O units

IOL
Connection

C300 Controller Architecture 300 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Types of Series C I/O Modules Honeywell
• HART Analog Input (AI) – 16 Channels

• HART Analog Output (AO) – 16 Channels

• Digital Input (DI)– 32 Channels – 2 physical types

– 24VDC Input – Common Ground (Non-Isolated)
– 100VAC/120VAC/125VDC/240VAC (Isolated)

• Digital Output (DO) – 32 Channels

– Relay Extension Board

• Low Level Analog Input (LL) – 64 channels

– Thermocouple and RTD

• AI, AO, DI and DO are optionally redundant

• LL Inputs are not available in redundant configuration

C300 Controller Architecture 301 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Non-Redundant Series C I/O Module Honeywell
• IOM is physically placed on I/O Module
I/O Link
an IOTA Connection

• The IOTA has all the wiring

and power connections

• The IOM has the Field

Termination
electronics and diagnostics

• AI, AO, and LL modules

mount on a 6” IOTA

• DI/DO modules mount on a

9” IOTA

Calibration

Resistors /
Jumpers

C300 Controller Architecture 302 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Question 1: Series C I/O Support Honeywell
Which of the following statements is true about C300 I/O Support?

A) Supports 2 I/O Link interfaces

B) Supports mix and match of I/O types
C) 64 primary IO units per C300, 40 per I/O Link
D) HLAI, HLAO, DI, DO and LL type Series C I/O's
E) All of the above

The correct
Your answer: answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
All All
of the
of the
above
above statements
statementsare
You must answer the question before
are
You true
true
did about
about
Incorrect
Correct
You
not Series
-answerSeries
answered
-Click
Click Cthis
C
I/O
anywhere
anywhere
this I/O
support.
support.
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 303 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Redundant Series C I/O Module Honeywell
• Same IO module as non redundant I/O Link
I/O Module Connection
• AI, AO, DI, DO modules mount on a
12” IOTA

• Modular Redundancy Field

Termination

• Modular Connection
System
– No Common Backplane
– No Single Point of Failure

I/O Termination
Assembly

Redundant IOM

C300 Controller Architecture 304 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Diagnostic LEDs Honeywell

• Power and Status LEDs on the module itself

• Provides display of any failure conditions

C300 Controller Architecture 305 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
HART Analog Input Honeywell
• 16 Analog Channels

• Supports Integrated HART

Communications

• 4 Analog Channels support

Voltage mode

• Optionally Redundant

• 50msec Scan for 4-20ma input

• 4 configurable modems

• 250ms Loop Latency

C300 Controller Architecture 306 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
HART Analog Input – Non Redundant Honeywell

I/O Link
Connections

Differential
Voltage Input Analog Input
Channels 13-16 I/O Module
I/O Link
Address

C300 Controller Architecture 307 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Question 2: Series C I/O Support Honeywell
Which of the these statements explains an IOTA?
A) IOTA has all wiring and power connections
B) Power and Status LEDs are located on the IOTA
C) Same IOTA is used for non-redundant and
redundant IOM

The
Your correct
answer:
Correct!
Incorrect. answer
TheThe
IOTA is: has
IOTA
has all the
all the
wiring
wiring
and
You must
and answer
power
power the question before
connections.
connections.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 308 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
IOM Addressing and IOLINK Honeywell
I/O Link
Connections

IOM Address

C300 Controller Architecture 309 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
HART Analog Input Wiring Options Honeywell
Channels 1-12 Channels 13-16

C300 Controller Architecture 310 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
HART Analog Input – Redundant Honeywell

Module Fuse
I/O Link
Connections

I/O Link
Address

Analog Input
I/O Module primary and
redundant

C300 Controller Architecture 311 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
HART Analog Input – New Detail Displays Honeywell

C300 Controller Architecture 312 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
HART Analog Output Honeywell
• 16 Analog Channels
• Supports Integrated HART
Communications
• Optionally Redundant
• 4 configurable modems
• 250ms Loop Latency when
used with Series C HLAI

C300 Controller Architecture 313 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
HART Analog Output, contd. Honeywell

Calibration I/O Link

Voltage Connections
Reference

I/O Link
Address

Analog Output
I/O Module

Standby Manual
(Future)

C300 Controller Architecture 314 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
HART Analog Output – New Detail Displays Honeywell

C300 Controller Architecture 315 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Low Level Inputs Honeywell
• 64 Channel Low Level Multiplexer Analog Input
– Thermocouple (T/C) and RTD
• Initially, the Series C LLMUX will only use the New Solid State FTAs
– Support for FTAs requiring the Power Adapter FTA will be provided in a
subsequent release
• With the new Solid State FTAs:
– OTD before propagation of PV every 1 sec
– Does not require Power Adapter FTA
– Can be used with existing UCN/xPM installations
• With the existing FTAs:
– OTD propagates every 30 sec
• FTAs will require standard FTA Channel and cannot be mounted on
IOTA Carrier

C300 Controller Architecture 316 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
LLMUX Solutions Honeywell
R300 Solution Power Adapter Solution (Future)
LL IN-CABINET CONFIGURATION LL REMOTE CONFIGURATION

A-Size
FTA Cable
Power Model MU-KFTAxxx Internal FTA Cabinet Cable Power
Status CU/CC-TAIM01 or Status CU/CC-TAIM11
51304465-xxx Internal Cabinet Cable Model KFTSxxx External FTA Cabinet Cable
PMIO LLMUX VL/BS [50 meters (164 feet) MAximum Length] PMIO LLMUX VL/BS C
CC-PAIM01
C CC-PAIM01
C LL TCMUX IOTA
LL TCMUX IOTA

6C
on PM
du FT
ct A
or Co
Ca nn
bl ec
eH to
ea r
d

Max. Length
1000 ft. 51304465-xxx Internal Cable
or
Model MU-KLXxxx External Cabinet Cable
[305 meters(1000 feet) Maximum Length]

B-Size B-Size

LLMUX Models
MU/MC-TAMT03
MU/MC-TAMR03
FTA Assemblies must be
FTA Assemblies must be MU/MC-TAMT13 installed in a cabinet or a
installed in a cabinet. MU/MC-TAMT04 NEMA 12 mounting box.
MU/MC-TAMR04
LLMUX Models MU/MC-TAMT14
MU/MC-TAMT04
MU/MC-TAMR04
MU/MC-TAMT14

New FTAs Only (no Power Adapter) New or Existing FTAs(Requires Power Adapter)

C300 Controller Architecture 317 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
LLMUX Solutions, contd. Honeywell
R300 Solution Power Adapter Solution (Future)
I/O Link
Connections

I/O Link
IOLINK
addressing
Address IOLINK
addressing

Fuses

C300 Controller Architecture 318 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Digital Input Honeywell
• 32 Channels
• Two (2) Physical IOM Types
1. 24VDC Input – Common
Ground (Non-Isolated)
2. 100VAC/120VAC/125VDC
/240VAC
(Isolated)
• Three (3) Physical IOTA Types
1. 24VDC
2. 120VAC/125VDC
3. 240VAC
• Optionally Redundant
• 100ms Loop Latency

C300 Controller Architecture 319 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Digital Input, contd. Honeywell
I/O Link
Connections
Digital Input
I/O Module
I/O Link
Address
Internal Used with Honeywell’s 24v power
supply

Pin 1 – external return

Pin 2 – external 24v

Pin 3 – internal return

Pin 4 – internal 24v

External Used with customer’s provided 24v

power supply

Pin 1 – external return

Pin 2 – external 24v

Pin 3 – internal return

Pin 4 – internal 24v

C300 Controller Architecture 320 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Digital Input – New Detail Displays Honeywell

C300 Controller Architecture 321 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Digital Output Honeywell
• 32 Channels
• 24VDC Bussed Output
• Relay Output
– 100VAC / 120VAC / 240VAC /
125VDC / 48VDC
– Utilizes Relay Extension Board
• Optionally Redundant
• 100ms Loop Latency

C300 Controller Architecture 322 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
 Digital Output, contd. Honeywell

I/O Link
Connections

I/O Link
Address

Internal Used with Honeywell’s 24v power

Digital Output supply

I/O Module Pin 1 – external return

Pin 2 – external 24v

Pin 3 – internal return

Pin 4 – internal 24v

External Used with customer’s provided 24v

power supply

Pin 1 – external return

Pin 2 – external 24v

Pin 3 – internal return

Pin 4 – internal 24v

C300 Controller Architecture 323 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Digital Output Module – with Relay Extender Honeywell

Relay Extension Panel

Digital Output IOTA

C300 Controller Architecture 324 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Digital Output – New Detail Displays Honeywell

C300 Controller Architecture 325 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas Honeywell
• Honeywell will initially work
with MTL to manufacturer an
IOTA for use wiring into hazardous
locations (C1D1 / Zone 1)
• The IOTA will be larger than a
standard IOTA (approximately
9” wide)
• 1-, 2- and 4-channel options will be available

C300 Controller Architecture 326 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas, contd. Honeywell

Standard
Non-Redundant IOTA Footprint
IOTA + IOM

6.00”

Redundant
IOTA + IOM

“Extended”
IOTA Footprint
for IS

C300 Controller Architecture 327 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas, contd. Honeywell
Cabinet Layout – Wide Channel

• Supports mixture of IS and general

purpose signals within same cabinet
• Cables are segregated using hazardous-
area trunking
• High vertical packing density

C300 Controller Architecture 328 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Process Manager I/O Honeywell
• No separate IOLIM needed, connects directly to
IOLink
• PM I/O includes AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C, DI
SOE
• PM I/O can be redundant
• FTA for I/O Direct connection
• Remote I/O using Fiber Optic to C300 IOLINK

PM I/O

C300 Controller Architecture 329 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Honeywell DE Transmitters and C300 Honeywell
• Support is provided for Honeywell DE-based smart transmitters in C300
via existing PMIO modules:
– Smart Transmitter Interface (STI)
– Smart Transmitter Interface – Multivariable (STI-MV)

• The Experion Platform provides full integration of all DE information

(diagnostics, configuration, etc.) within the standard system displays

• No additional Asset Management software (e.g., Asset Manager PKS or

Field Device Manager) is required to access the DE data

C300 Controller Architecture 330 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
FTE Bridge in Series C Honeywell
• FTE Bridge, as part of a Series C
system allows:
– A C300 Controller to use selected
Series A chassis I/O (Serial,
DeviceNet, Profibus, and Pulse Input
modules) without the need for a C200
– A C300 to communicate (Exchange
Block peer-to-peer) with Rockwell
devices like PLC5 and CL5550 using
a bridge chassis with a FTEB and
downlink CNI
• The FTEB continues to operate at
10Mbps after updating firmware to
support C300 communication with
Series A Chassis I/O
• C200 with FTEB can be used for
Peer to Peer with a C300 Controller

C300 Controller Architecture 331 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Question 3: Series C I/O Honeywell
Which of the following I/Os are available in
a Series C type?

A) HLAI, HLAO, Profibus I/O, LL Inputs

B) DI, DO, HLAI, HLAO, LL Inputs
C) HLAI, HLAO, LL Inputs, Serial Interface
D) Serial Interface, DeviceNet, PulseInput, HLAI

Incorrect.
TheCorrect!
Your correctThe
answer:TheI/O's
answer I/O's available
is:availableininaa
Series C type are DI, DO, HLAI,
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did HLAO
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
ClickLL
and anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
Inputs.correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 332 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Question 4: FTEB in Series C Honeywell
Which of the following scenarios are available for a FTEB to publish I/O
data to a C300?
A) FTEB in redundant chassis connected to C300
B) FTEB in a non-redundant chassis connected to
C300 via Control Firewall
C) FTEB in a non-redundant chassis connected to
C300 via L1 or L2 switch

The
Your correct
answer:
Incorrect.
Correct! answer
The
The valid is:
validscenario
scenarioforforFTEB
FTEBtotopublish
publishI/O
I/O
data You
to C300
mustisanswer
" FTEBthein aquestion
non redundant
before I/O chassis
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
connected to C300 via Control Firewall."
continuing

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 333 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
C300 I/O Compatibility Honeywell
I/O C300 C200 xPM I/O C300 C200 xPM
I/O Type I/O Type
Family Support Support Support Family Support Support Support
HLAI    HLAI16 
HLAI w/ HART   HLAI6 
LLAI    HLAI8 w/ HART 
LLMUX    LLAI-TC6 
RHMUX    LLAI-RTD6 
STI    AO6V 
STI-MV    AO6MA 
AO8    AO8 
AO16    AO8 w/ HART 
PMIO

 

CHASSIS SERIES-A
AO16 w/ HART    Pulse (6I2O)
Serial Device  DI120A16I 
Serial  DI220A16I 
Pulse  DI120A8D 
DI    DI120A16 
DI-24V    DI24D16I 
DISOE   
DI24D16D 
DO16   
DI24D32 
DO32   
DO220A16-Relay 
DO24D16I 
Fieldbus 
DO24D16D 
I/O C300 C200 xPM DO24D32 
I/O Type Serial  
Family Support Support Support
Fieldbus 
HLAI w/ HART 
Profibus DP  
LLMUX64 
DeviceNet  
AO16 w/ HART 
SERIES C

DI24D32 
DI32 
DO24D32 
DO32 
Fieldbus 

C300 Controller Architecture 334 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
C300 I/O Compatibility, contd. Honeywell
I/O C300 C200 xPM
I/O Type
Family Support Support Support
HLAI 
DI24D 
DI120A 

SERIES A
LLAI-TC 

RAIL -
LLAI-RTD 
AO 
DO24D 
DO120A 
DO-Relay 

I/O C300 C200 xPM

I/O Type
Family Support Support Support
HLAI8 
LLAI8 
SERIES H
RAIL –

AO8 
DI16 
DO4 
DI16 

C300 Controller Architecture 335 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe Series C Input/Output Modules and Options

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

C300 Controller Architecture 336 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options 7/5/2023
 Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series
C System

C300 Controller Architecture 337 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
Series C IO Topology Rules Honeywell
• I/O topology rules
– 2 IOLINKS
– PMIO and Series C I/O on same C300
– Connect select series A I/O using FTEB
– Connect Allen Bradley PLCs using FTEB

C300 Controller Architecture 338 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
C300 Topology Rules – IO Capacity Honeywell

A C300 can support a maximum of 64 IO Units (IOU)

Series C IO and PM IO count as 1 IOU each
Series C IO and PMIO are connected to C300 using
IO LINKS
Series A I/O also consume IOUs, shown later

C300 Controller Architecture 339 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
C300 Topology Rules – IO Capacity, contd. Honeywell

Each IO Link can support a maximum of 40 IOUs

A C300 controller supports 2 IOLINKs
An IOLINK can be configured for either Series C IO
(at 750 kb link speed) or PMIO (at 375 kb link speed)
An IOLINK cannot support both Series C IO and
PMIO on the same link

C300 Controller Architecture 340 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
Series C IO and PMIO mix Honeywell
#1: Series C I/O #2: PMIO
TOTAL 64 IOUs TOTAL 64 IOUs

Link 1 Link 2 Link 1 Link 2

750 kbps 750 kbps 375 kbps 375 kbps

40 PRI 24 PRI 24 PRI 40 PRI

Series C IOMs Series C IOMs PM - IOPs PM - IOPs
40 RED 24 RED 24 RED 40 RED
Series C IOMs Series C IOMs PM - IOPs PM - IOPs

#3: Series C +PMIO #4: Series C +PMIO

TOTAL 64 IOUs TOTAL 64 IOUs

Link 1 Link 2 Link 1 Link 2

750 kbps 375 kbps 375 kbps 750 kbps

40 PRI 24 PRI 40 PRI 24 PRI

Series C IOMs PM - IOPs PM - IOPs Series C IOMs
40 RED 24 RED 40 RED 24 RED
Series C IOMs PM - IOPs PM - IOPs Series C IOMs

C300 Controller Architecture 341 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
C300 Topology Rules – IO Capacity Honeywell

A C300 can support up to 8 FTEBs for interfacing with

supported Chassis I/O or AB PLC interface
FTEBs must be connected to the same Control Firewall
as the C300
This limits the FTEBs to 6 per redundant C300
controller

C300 Controller Architecture 342 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
C300 Topology Rules – IO Capacity, contd. Honeywell

Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support

up to 16 IOUs. The IOU count per module is
Serial Interface 4 DeviceNet Interface 2
Profibus Interface 2 Pulse Input 1

The FTEB used for Series A cannot be in a

redundant configuration

C300 Controller Architecture 343 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
C300 Controller I/O Link Configurations Honeywell

#5: Series C + PMIO + Series A

TOTAL 64 IOUs

C300 16 Series A IO
Capacity 3 – MIX #3 Units w/FTEB
FTE
Link 1 Link 2
Pulse Input,
750 kbps 375 kbps
Serial, DeviceNet,
and ProfiBus
IOMs only

24 PRI 24 PRI
Series C IOMs PM-IOPs
24 RED 24 RED
Series C IOMs PM-IOPs

C300 Controller Architecture 344 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
C300 Topology Rules – IO Capacity Honeywell

Important limitations:
An FTEB connected chassis can allow connections
to only 1 C300 controller
You cannot have any other C200, IO or CNI
downlink modules in the FTEB chassis to connect to
other IO chassis

C300 Controller Architecture 345 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
C300 Topology Rules – IO Capacity, contd. Honeywell

CNI, ENET or DHRIO only

FTEBs can be used to connect AB PLCs for Peer to

Peer, using Exchange Blocks.
A maximum of 32 exchange blocks, and a maximum
of 8 PLCs can be connected
The interface uses Control Net to the AB PLCs and
allows only the CNI, ENET or DHRIO

C300 Controller Architecture 346 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
C300 Topology Rules – IO Capacity, contd. Honeywell

A Series C FIM can be used with or without the C300

controller
A FIM needs to connect to a C300 controller if a
combined control strategy is needed
A FIM counts as 4 IOUs
A C300 controller can support 15 FIMs

C300 Controller Architecture 347 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
C300 Topology Rules – IO Capacity, contd. Honeywell

An Experion Server can support upto 125 FIMs

A FIM supports 4 H1 links, with 16 devices per link
Do the math: An Experion server can support 500
links, with a total of 8000 FieldBus devices!

C300 Controller Architecture 348 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
Question 1: IO Topology Rules Honeywell
Which of the following statements is not true for Series C IO Topology
Rules?
A) Series C, PM and Series C A IO on the same
IO Link
B) Series C and PM IO cannot be on the same IO Link
C) FTEB connected chassis can allow connections to
only 1 C300 controller
D) Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support
up to 16 IOUs

Incorrect. Series C, PM and Series A IO on the same

Correct! Series C, PM and Series A IO on the same IOLINK
IOLINK is not true for a Series C IO Topology. An IOLINK
is not true for a Series C IO Topology. An IOLINK cannot
cannot support both Series C IO and PMIO on the same
support
Your
The both
correct
answer: Seriesis:
answer C IO and PMIO on the same link. An
link. An FTEB connected to the same Control Firewall as
FTEB connected
You must to the
answer can same
the Control
question Firewall as the C300
before
the
You C300
Incorrect
Correct
did You
notcontroller
-
answer
answered
-Click
Click publish
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question Series
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continueA IO data to the
completely
controller can continuing
publish Series A IO data to the C300.
C300.
Click anywhere to continue. Submit Clear
Click anywhere to continue.

C300 Controller Architecture 349 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
Question 2: Topology Rules Honeywell
For a project it is required to use Fieldbus only control strategy for 1500 FF
devices. How many C300 controllers are required?
A) 2 C300 Controllers + 24 FIM Modules
B) 1 C300 Controller + 48 FIM Modules
C) No C300 Controllers are required, only 24 Series C
FIM Modules

TheYes!
No.
Your The
The correct
correctcorrect
answer:answerstatement
statement
is: is
is "No
"No C300
C300 controllers
controllers are
are
required, only 24 Series C FIM Modules". Since the
project requires only Fieldbus control strategy the C300
You must
controller answer
is not the question
required. Each FIMbefore
Module has 4 FF links
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
totocontinue
continue
completely
and each link continuing
supports 16 FF devices. Hence 1 FIM
module can support a maximum of 64 (16*4) FF devices.
Hence only 24 (1500/64) Series C FIM Modules are
required.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 350 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
Question 3: Topology Rules Honeywell
FTEBs can be used in the Series C topology under specific scenarios.
Which of the these is true?
A) FTEB connected to AB PLC via Downlink CNI
B) FTEBs must be connected to the same Control
Firewall as the C300
C) An FTEB connected chassis can allow connections
to only 1 C300 controller
D) All of the above

The correct
Your answer: answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
All All
of of
thethe
above
above
statements
statements areare
correct
correct
for
You
formust
FTEBs
FTEBs answer
used
usedinthe
in
thequestion
theSeries
Series before
Ccompletely
Ctopology.
topology.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 351 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell


• There are 2 IOLINKS per C300 System
– Mix and match of Series C I/O and PMIO is an option
– Specific Series A I/O and AB PLC can be connected using FTEB
– Same IOLINK cannot support both Series C and PM IO


• A C300 can support a maximum of 64 IO Units (IOU)
– Each IO Link can support a maximum of 40 IOUs
– A C300 can support up to 8 FTEBs for interfacing with supported Chassis I/O or AB
PLC interface
– FTEBs must be connected to the same Control Firewall as the C300
– Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support up to 16 IOUs
– The FTEB used for Series A cannot be in a redundant configuration


• A Series C FIM can be used with or without the C300 controller


• A C300 controller can support 15 FIMs


• An Experion Server can support up to 125 FIMs

C300 Controller Architecture 352 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the I/O Topology Rules for the Series C System

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

C300 Controller Architecture 353 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C300 Controller Architecture 354 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System 7/5/2023
 Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its
Connection Rules

C300 Controller Architecture 355 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Overview
• Series C I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender Module
• Topology – Series C IOM, PM IOP
• Topology Type – Daisy Chain, Star, Tree
• Distance Limitation
• Cabinet Layout
• Specifications

C300 Controller Architecture 356 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Overview Honeywell
• C300 controller can now be connected remotely to Series C I/O or PMIO
through the use of an I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender (FOE) module
• Same FOE cannot be used for Series C and PMIO connections,
concurrently
• Each FOE can connect to two remote sites
– Two fiber optic ports sets, FO1 and FO2
– Ports have both receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx)
• Mounting options
– IOTA
– Din Rail
– Stand Alone
• Two types of IOLINK cables
– PMIO
– Series C

C300 Controller Architecture 357 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Series C I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender Module Honeywell
24V DC IOLINK cable

COMMON
Carrier
Mounting
Screws
Fiber Optic
Extender IOTA

Fuse
LED Indicators

FOE to IOTA
Mounting Screw FOE to IOTA
power
connection
Fiber Optic
ports

I/O Link
Connector

C300 Controller Architecture 358 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Topology – Series C IOM Honeywell

IO Link
Cable

IOM
C300
Remote
1.5 Km Max. Site A
1.5 Km
Max.
Fiber Optic 4 KM Max. (requires
Remote Cable IOLE every 1.5 km)
Site B

• Configuration possible are

Star Daisy chain Tree (Star + Daisy chain)

IOM Series C IOM Series C IOM Series C IOM

C300 Controller Architecture 359 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Topology – PM IOP Honeywell
IO Link 1.5 Km Max.
Cable

C300

1.5 Km 1.5 Km
Max. Fiber Optic Max.
10 Km Max. Cable
(requires
IOLE every
1.5 Km)

PM IOP PM IOP
With IOLink Extender IOP With IOLink Extender IOP
IOLink Extender
Remote Site A Remote Site B
pair MC-IOLX02

C300 Controller Architecture 360 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Topology Type – Daisy Chain Honeywell

IOM
C300

IO Link
Cable

Main Remote Remote

Location Site 1 Site 2

FOE Fiber Optic

Cable

C300 Controller Architecture 361 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Topology Type – Star Honeywell

IO Link
Cable

FOE
Main
Location

Fiber Optic
Cable

Remote Remote
Site 1 Site 3

IOM

Remote Remote
Site 2 Site 4

• It is possible to have multiple fiber-optic extenders in any location, provided

distance limitations are observed and no more than 40 IOMs on a single I/O Link
C300 Controller Architecture 362 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Topology Type – Tree Honeywell

C300 IO Link FOE

Cable

Fiber1
Fiber2

Fiber3

Fiber1
Fiber2 IOM

IOM Fiber3
Main Remote Remote
Location Site 1 Site 2

Fiber Optic
Cable

C300 Controller Architecture 363 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Distance Limitations Honeywell
Main Remote
Location Site#1
d1

C300

IOM

IOM
d2

Remote Remote Remote

Site#2 Site#3 Site#4
d4
d3

IOM IOM IOM

• Maximum distance of any single fiber-optic segment must be less than 1.5 km
▪ d1, d2, d3, d4 <= 1.5 km
• Maximum distance of any single “leg” must be less than 4.0 km. In above figure,
▪ 0.25 + d1 + 0.25 <= 4.0 km
▪ 0.25 + d2 + 0.25 + d3 + 0.25 + d4 + 0.25 <= 4.0 km
C300 Controller Architecture 364 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Distance Limitations (Example) Honeywell
Main Remote
Location Site#1
d1 = 1.5 km

C300

IOM

IOM
d2 = 1.0 km

Remote Remote Remote

Site#3
d4 = Site#4
Site#2
d3 = 1 km
1.0 km

IOM IOM IOM

• The connections shown in figure above will work because,

– d1(1.5), d2(1.0), d3 (1.0), d4(1.0) <= 1.5 km
– 0.25 + d1(1.5) + 0.25 = 2.0 <= 4.0 km
0.25 + d2(1.0) + 0.25 + d3(1.0) + 0.25 + d4(1.0) + 0.25 = 4.0 <= 4.0 km

C300 Controller Architecture 365 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Distance Limitations (Example), contd. Honeywell
Main Remote
Location Site#1
d1 = 2.0 km
C300

IOM

IOM
d2 = 1.5 km

Remote Remote Remote

Site#3
d4 = Site#4
Site#2
d3 = 1 km
1.5 km

IOM IOM IOM

• The connections shown in above figure will not work because,

– d1(2.0) which is not <= 1.5 km
– 0.25 + d2(1.5) + 0.25 + d3(1.5) + 0.25 + d4(1.0) + 0.25 = 5.0 km
which is not <= 4.0 km

C300 Controller Architecture 366 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Cabinet Layout Honeywell

C300
FOE can use Controller
either Violet
or Grey IOL

Control
Firewall

FOE – A
I/O Link
Extender for Digital Input
Link A Card

FOE – B
I/O Link
Extender for
Link B

C300 Controller Architecture 367 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
Specifications Honeywell
• Power Supply Options
– 20 to 30V @ 200mA
• Distance
– Segment distance: 1.5 Km
– Total maximum IOLink length
• Series C IO: 4 Km
• PM IO: 10 Km
– Propagation delay: each IOLE fiber optic converter subtracts a certain value
from the total IOLink length
• Series C IO: 0.25 Km per FOE
• PM IO: 0.5 Km per FOE
• Fiber-Optic
– Fiber type: Multimode
– Fiber core diameter: 62.5 mm
– Fiber cladding diameter: 125 mm
– Fiber connectors: ST type
– Power budget: 8 db min, 15 db typical

C300 Controller Architecture 368 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Fiber Optic Extender and its Connection Rules 7/5/2023
 Describe the Control Firewall Connections in
the Series C System

C300 Controller Architecture 369 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System 7/5/2023
Overview Honeywell
• Topology rules pertaining to the Control Firewall
• Overview of FTE limits

C300 Controller Architecture 370 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System 7/5/2023
C300 Topology Rules – Control Firewall Honeywell

C300, Series C FIMs must be connected to the

Control Firewall.
The C300 and any FTEBs assigned to it must be on
the same control firewall
No other device, such as FTEB for C200, Ethernet
PLCs, Stations or Servers, can connect to the Control
Firewall

C300 Controller Architecture 371 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System 7/5/2023
C300 Topology Rules – Control Firewall, contd. Honeywell

The Control Firewall is connected by uplink to a L1 or

L2 switch. Connections can be Fiber Optic or STP
Cable.
Fiber Optic: 2 KM multi mode or 15 KM single mode.
STP cable: CAT 5 up to 100 M
Control Firewalls cannot be cascaded

C300 Controller Architecture 372 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System 7/5/2023
How Many FTE Nodes Do You Have? Honeywell
• An FTE Community can have no more than 330 FTE Nodes calculated
as follows:
– Max. 125 Redundant FIMs per Server = 125 x 2 = 250
– Max. 16 Redundant C300s per Server = 16 x 2 = 32
– Max. 40 Stations = 40
– Max. 1 Redundant Server = 2
– Max. 5 ACE = 5
– GRAND TOTAL: 329
• If any FTEBs are present in the Community, the limit is 200 FTE Nodes
• Embedded FTE used in C300 and Series C FIM is at the MAC level, and
therefore “yellow” and “green” have same IP address
• Servers and Workstations require one IP address per NIC port

C300 Controller Architecture 373 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System 7/5/2023
Question 1: Control Firewall Honeywell
Which of the following is not a valid connection to a Control Firewall?

A) Series C FIM
B) C300 Controller
C) FTEB for specific Series A IO
D) FTEB for C200

Incorrect.
Correct! FTEB
FTEBforforC200
C200controller
controllerisisnot
notaavalid
validdevice
deviceto
to
connect to Control Firewall. No device such as FTEB for
C200, Ethernet PLCs, Stations or Servers, can connect to
Yourcorrect
The answer: answertheis: Control Firewall
Correct
Incorrect
You
Youmust
did
- Click
not
-answer
Click
answer
anywhere
anywhere
thethis
question
to before
You answered this correctly!
question
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 374 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell


• C300 and Series C FIM must be connected to the Control Firewall
– No other device, such as FTEB for C200, Ethernet PLCs, Stations or
Servers, can connect to the Control Firewall


• C300 and FTEB (for specific Series A IO and AB devices) associated to
it must be on the same Control Firewall


• The Control Firewall is connected by uplink to a L1 or L2 switch


• Control Firewalls cannot be cascaded

C300 Controller Architecture 375 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

Describe the Control Firewall connections in the

Series C System

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

C300 Controller Architecture 376 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System 7/5/2023
 Define a Typical Series C Configuration

C300 Controller Architecture 377 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Define a Typical Series C Configuration 7/5/2023
Putting the Pieces Together Honeywell

C300 Controller Architecture 378 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Define a Typical Series C Configuration 7/5/2023
Question 1: Connectivity Honeywell
A C300 Controller has PM IO connected to both IOLINKs. Some of the data
is obtained from a remote monitoring system 5 km from the C300 cabinet.
Which of the following is the correct option?

A) Extend the PM IO using IO Link Extender

B) Series C FIM
C) Series C IO

Correct!
The
Your Incorrect.
To get
correct
answer: Todata
answer getis:
from
data the
fromremote
the remote
vibrating
vibrating
monitoring
You must answer the question beforePM IO
monitoring
system extend
system the
extend
PM IOthe
using
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
notusing
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
IOanywhere
Link anywhere
this
this
Linkquestion
correctly!
Extender. to
tocontinue
Extender.continue
completely
continuing

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Controller Architecture 379 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Define a Typical Series C Configuration 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell


• C300 controllers, Series C FIM, and FTEB for Series A IO are connected
to the Control Firewall


• Series C and PM IO are connected to the C300 controller by the two
IOLINKs on C300 Controller IOTA
– Series C and PM IO cannot be mixed on the same IOLINK


• Remote PMIO is implemented using the PM IO Link Extender


• C300 can be associated to Series A IO directly via FTEB only when
Profibus, DeviceNet, Serial Interface and Pulse Input modules are
required

C300 Controller Architecture 380 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Define a Typical Series C Configuration 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Define a Typical Series C Configuration

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

C300 Controller Architecture 381 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Define a Typical Series C Configuration 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C300 Controller Architecture 382 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Define a Typical Series C Configuration 7/5/2023
 HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 383 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Generate Display Reports
– Use Browser search options for Display Shapes

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 384 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Generating Display Reports


• Browser Search Options

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 385 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Display Documentation Tool Honeywell
• HMIWeb Display Documentation Tool
– Tool used in HMIWeb Display Builder to document display content
– Accessible from the Tools drop down menu in the HMIWeb Display Builder

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 386 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Display report Honeywell
• A display report can include the following information:
– Object properties
– Point information
– Stylesheet properties
– Scripts
– Shape list
– Custom properties

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 387 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Display Report Details Honeywell

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 388 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Report Format Honeywell
• Click Next
• The report generated cannot be edited, but can be saved in either XML
or HTML format

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 389 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Save Report Honeywell
• Save the Report with its display name (T_100_Report)

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 390 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Generating Display Reports


• Browser Search Options

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 391 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Overview of Browser Honeywell
• Search engine embedded in Configuration Studio
• Browser can be used to:
– Search system databases, folders and files to determine where specific
objects (display shapes, strategies, templates and parameters) are used
– Save search criteria

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 392 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Browser Functions Honeywell
• Browser searches:
– Where Used
• Strategies/Process Points in Display Files
• Asset and Alarm Group references in Display Files
• Display Shape references in Display Files
– All/Any search :
• Searches all information that matches the specified character string,
regardless of object type in the selected databases and display files
• Search criteria can be saved in xml files for future use
• Search results can be saved and exported in xml and csv file formats to
be viewed in other software applications

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 393 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Browser Search: Scope Honeywell
• The scope of the Browser search:
– System level: provides the user with an option to search all or any of the
servers (DSA servers) configured in the Enterprise system
– Server level: will search only the server from where it is launched

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 394 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Use Point Picker (Displays Shapes) Honeywell
• Where Used - Displays Shapes
– Shows all files (.htm and .sha) that exist in the display share files
– Click corresponding checkboxes to search the display/shape files

Point
Picker

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 395 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Where Used-Displays Shapes Honeywell
• Displays/Shapes
– Search results display/shape references

Search
results

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 396 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Context Menu Honeywell
• Right-click Context Menu
– Directly open HMIWeb Display Builder

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 397 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• To summarize:

– Use the Tools pull-down menu in HMIWeb Display Builder and select
Display Report

– Select the information to include in the report

– Do a “Save As” to create a file documenting your display
– Use the Browse function in Configuration to search for display shapes

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 398 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Lab Example: Generate Display Report Honeywell

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 399 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe HMIWeb Display Documentation Tool

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 400 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Documentation Tools 7/5/2023
 Specialized Editing Tasks

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 401 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will know how to:
– Create a new object from
overlapping vector objects

– Combine vector objects to

improve a display’s Combine tool
performance
– Change an object’s shape Node Editor
with the Node Editor

– Perform a task on a set of

displays and shapes using
Display Builder Assistant

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 402 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Working with vector objects


• Keyboard shortcuts


• HMIWeb Display Builder Assistant

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 403 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Vector Objects Honeywell
• Vector objects:
– Are line-based objects
– Include a rectangle, rounded rectangle, oval, line, polyline, polygon, Bezier
curve, arc, wedges and textbox

• With vector objects:

– Create a new object from overlapping objects
– Combine objects to improve a display’s performance
– Change an object’s shape with the Node Editor

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 404 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
A New Object from Overlapping Objects Honeywell
• When creating a new object from two or more overlapping vector
objects, the new object inherits:
– the properties, such as the name, color and line thickness, from the
reference object (the first object selected)
– the scripts and dynamic data binding of the reference object

• When creating the new vector object, the original objects are deleted

Reference
object

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 405 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
A New Object from Overlapping Objects Honeywell

If you start with this (the red And click You get
object is selected first): this: this:

*
* This only works with open objects such as lines and polylines
HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 406 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Combining Objects Honeywell
• Combine static vector objects such as rectangles, ovals and polylines
• Combining converts the objects into a single metafile, making it easier to
render
• To combine vector graphic objects:

1. Select the objects

2. Click the Group tool on the Arrange Toolbar to group the
objects Group tool
3. Click the Combine tool on the Transformations
Toolbar
Combine tool

• Note in Object Explorer how the group converts into a single object

Before combining After combining

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 407 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
How to Uncombine Objects Honeywell
• To uncombine a previously combined object:
1. Select the object and click the Uncombine tool
on the Transformations Toolbar
The combined object reverts to a group Uncombine tool

2. If necessary, you can click the Ungroup tool on the

Arrange Toolbar to ungroup the objects
Ungroup tool

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 408 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Node Editor Honeywell
• Use the Node Editor to change a vector object's shape by moving or
adding nodes
• The nodes are the object's apexes or reference points

• To edit an object’s nodes:

1. Select the object

2. Click the Node Editor button on the Node Editor

Toolbox Toolbar
A small square will indicate each of the
object’s nodes

3. Move the mouse pointer over a node and

drag the node as required

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 409 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Node Editor Honeywell
• Before using the Node Editor, the user
must convert some types of objects,
such as rectangles and ovals, to a path
(line)

• To convert an object to a path, select the

object and click the Convert to Path
button on the Transformations Toolbar
Convert to Path button

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 410 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Working with vector objects


• Keyboard shortcuts

• HMIWeb Display Builder Assistant

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 411 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Keyboard Shortcuts Honeywell

Align the left edges of selected objects <Ctrl>+<Q>

Align (horizontally) the centers of selected objects <Ctrl>+<W>
Align the right edges of selected objects <Ctrl>+<E>
Align the top edges of selected objects <Ctrl>+<1>
Align (vertically) the middle of selected objects <Ctrl>+<2>
Align the bottom edges of selected objects <Ctrl>+<3>
Bring selected object to top of stack <Ctrl>+<PageUp>
Bring selected object 1 layer up (towards the top of stack) <Shift>+<PageUp>
Copy selected object to the clipboard <Ctrl>+<C>
Create a new (standard) display <Ctrl>+<N>
Cut selected object to the clipboard <Ctrl>+<X>
Delete selected object <Delete>
Duplicate selected object <Ctrl>+<D>

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 412 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Keyboard Shortcuts Honeywell

Group selected objects <Ctrl>+<G>

Open a display <Ctrl>+<O>
Paste contents of clipboard into display <Ctrl>+<V>
Print current display <Ctrl>+<P>
Redo command that has been undone <Ctrl>+<Y>
Save current display <Ctrl>+<S>
Select all objects <Ctrl>+<A>
Send selected object to bottom of stack <Ctrl>+<PageDown>
Send selected object 1 layer down (towards the bottom of <Shift>+<PageDown>
the stack)
Show/hide Properties Window <Alt>+<Enter>
Undo action <Ctrl>+<Z>
Ungroup selected group <Ctrl>+ <U>

For details, see “Setting up HMIWeb Display Builder” in Knowledge Builder

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 413 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Working with vector objects

• Keyboard shortcuts


• HMIWeb Display Builder Assistant

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 414 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
HMIWeb Display Builder Assistant Honeywell
• To open the HMIWeb Display Builder Assistant:

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 415 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
HMIWeb Display Builder Assistant Honeywell
• Perform a range of tasks on a set of displays and shapes with the Display
Builder Assistant:

– Rename Points
– Embed Shapes
– Upgrade
Embedded
Shapes
– Replace Shapes
– Archive Displays
& Shapes
– Unarchive
Displays &
Shapes

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 416 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When building displays, shapes and objects with Display Builder,
remember:

– Vector objects are line-based objects including a rectangle, rounded

rectangle, oval, line, polyline, polygon, Bezier curve, arc, wedge, and textbox

– Create a new object from overlapping vector objects using the buttons in the
Transformations toolbar

– New
object
vector objects inherit the name and other properties from the reference

– Use the Group and Combine tools to combine vector objects and improve a
display’s performance

– Change an object’s shape using the Node Editor

– Use the Display Builder Assistant to upgrade multiple embedded shapes and
rename points

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 417 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe Specialized Editing Tasks

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the HMIWeb Display Builder Basics lab exercise

HMIWeb Reporting and Specialized Editing Functions 418 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Specialized Editing Tasks 7/5/2023
 Describe the Functionality of Control Builder

Control Builder Introduction 419 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn about the
purpose and use of the Control Builder
application

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will

be able to:

– Open and navigate Control Builder

– Identify the toolbar icons and functionality

– Explain the purpose of the tabs in the

tree windows

– Describe the load functions available

from the Control Builder Project and
Monitoring tabs

Control Builder Introduction 420 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Starting Control Builder

• Control Builder Functions
• Control Builder Load Function

Control Builder Introduction 421 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Start Control Builder Honeywell

Open Configuration Studio

CLICK

Control Builder Introduction 422 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Start Control Builder, contd. Honeywell

CLICK

Select the server.

Then, select the Connect button.

CLICK

Control Builder Introduction 423 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Start Control Builder, contd. Honeywell

Log in

Change to

User Name: mngr

Password: mngr1
Domain: <Traditional Operator Security>

Control Builder Introduction 424 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Start Control Builder, contd. Honeywell

CLICK

Select Control Strategy

Control Builder Introduction 425 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Start Control Builder, contd. Honeywell

CLICK

Select Configure process control strategies

Control Builder Introduction 426 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Starting Control Builder

• Control Builder Functions

• Control Builder Load Function

Control Builder Introduction 427 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder Toolbar Honeywell

Not all toolbar icons will be available until

you open Control Builder items

Control Builder Introduction 428 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder Toolbar, contd. Honeywell

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 171819 20 21 22 23 24

1 Open Tree Window 11 Display help information

2 Close active Control Drawing 12 Point Selection Command
or Tree Window 13 Create a wire for connecting function
3 Move to the Left blocks
4 Move to the Right 14 Create a Parameter Connector
5 Save the active Control Drawing 15 Assign Modules to a Control
6 Delete the selected object Execution Environment (CEE)
7 Copy selection and place on 16 Module Containment
clipboard 17 Load selected items
8 Paste clipboard contents 18 Upload selected items
9 Print selected pages of active 19 Substitute Names
document 20 QVCS Manager
10 Display program information 21 Toggle single item state
22 SCM Navigation
23 Fieldbus DD import
24 Change scale dimensions

Control Builder Introduction 429 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder Status Line Honeywell

Security level

Experion PKS server name

Control Builder Introduction 430 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder Tree Windows Honeywell
3

1
2

1 & 2. Clicking the first Open Tree

Window button will open one
or two tree views. The
second icon will close the
windows.

3. Clicking the Open Library

button will open the Library tree

Control Builder Introduction 431 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder Tree Windows, contd. Honeywell
• Tabs appear at the bottom of each tree window

Control Builder Introduction 432 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder Tabs Honeywell
• The Project Tab displays the CPM, IOMs, CMs and SCMs in the current
project

• The Project Tab is linked directly to the ERDB in the Experion Server

Control Builder Introduction 433 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder Tabs, contd. Honeywell
• The Monitoring Tab:

– Displays all objects loaded to the control

processor module (CPM)

– Permits active modules to be viewed and

controlled during process operations

Control Builder Introduction 434 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder Monitoring Tab Honeywell
• To disable the online viewing of
control modules in the monitoring
tab click:

Chart > Disable Chart Monitoring

Control Builder Introduction 435 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder Tabs Honeywell
• The Library Tab displays all available system function blocks grouped
into type categories

Control Builder Introduction 436 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Question 1: Control Builder Functions Honeywell
Control Builder is :
A) An online documentation tool for C200
controllers and Experion PKS servers
B) A tool used only for building graphics
C) A graphical tool used to design control
strategies for C200, C300, ACE and SCE
to save run time data
D) A graphical tool used to view plant graphics

Correct!
TheIncorrect.
Your Control
correct
answer: Control
answer builder
builder
is: is a isgraphical
a graphical
tooltool
used
to design
used tocontrol
designstrategies
control strategies
for C200, for
C300,
C200,ACE
You must answer the question before
C300,
You didand
ACE
not SCE
Incorrect
Correct
You -and
-answerand
SCE
answered
Click
Click save
and
anywhere
anywhere
thisthisrun
save
question time
torun
correctly!
to data.
time data.
continue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

Control Builder Introduction 437 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Starting Control Builder

• Control Builder Functions

• Control Builder Load Function

Control Builder Introduction 438 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder Load Function Honeywell

Controller

Control Builder Introduction 439 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder Load Function, contd. Honeywell

Project / Monitor Tabs

Update
Server Project Monitor
RTDB Tab Tab

Load
Checkpoint
Windows

Upload
Save Load (reload)
Controller

Restore
Controller

Control Processor

Control Builder Introduction 440 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Question 2: Load Operation Honeywell
During the load operation from the Control Builder project tab, control
strategies are downloaded:

A) Only to the C200 controller

B) To C200 memory, the monitor
tab and the server real time database
C) Only to the server real time database
D) Only to the C200 memory and monitor tab

The correct
Your answer: answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
You must During
During the load
answer the
the load
operation
operation
question fromfrom
before Control
Control
Builder
YouIncorrect
Correct
did tab,
project
Builder You
not -answer
answered
-Click
projectClick
control anywhere
tab, anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
strategies
control to
tocontinue
continue
completely
strategies
are downloaded
are downloaded
to C200
continuing
tomemory,
C200 memory,
the monitor
the monitor
tab andtabtheand
server
the server
real time
real
timedatabase.
database.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

Control Builder Introduction 441 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• Control Builder:

– IsStudio
a graphical, object-oriented configuration environment in Configuration
used to design, implement and document control applications

– Has toolbar icons that become available when specific Control Builder items
are opened

– Has tree window tabs to help you design control applications

• The Project tab displays the CPM, IOMs, CMs and SCMs in the current
project
• The Monitoring tab displays all objects that have been loaded to the
control processor module (CPM) and permits active modules to be
viewed and controlled during process
• The Library tab displays all available system CMs and function blocks
grouped into type categories that can be used to build control strategies
– Control strategies download to C200 memory, the monitor tab and the server
 real time database

Control Builder Introduction 442 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Control Builder Introduction 443 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Control Builder Introduction 444 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Functionality of Control Builder 7/5/2023
 Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and
Compare Parameters

Control Builder Introduction 445 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn the purpose and use of the checkpoint and
compare parameters functions in Control Builder

• At the conclusion of this lesson,

you will know how to:

– Locate the checkpoint file

– Save a checkpoint file

automatically or manually

– Compare system parameters

Control Builder Introduction 446 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell

• The checkpoint function:

– Allows you to save and restore operational and configuration data

associated with a control strategy

– C300, series CI/O & PM I/O (when used with C300)

– LIOM

– OPC gateway on ACE

– Helps minimize downtime caused by a process or hardware anomaly

• The compare parameters function:

– Allows you to compare the parameters on function blocks in your ERDB with
parameters on the same function blocks loaded on your controller

Control Builder Introduction 447 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Locating the Checkpoint File

• Saving Checkpoint Files
• Checkpoint support
• Comparing System Parameters

Control Builder Introduction 448 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Checkpoint File Location Honeywell
• The checkpoint file is created on the local server path

Control Builder Introduction 449 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Checkpoint File Location, contd. Honeywell

Checkpoint

Control Builder Introduction 450 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Question 1: Checkpoint File Location Honeywell
Where is the Checkpoint File stored?
A) C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Honeywell\Checkpoint
B) C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS
C) C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Experion PKS\Checkpoint
D) C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Checkpoint

Yourcorrect
The answer:answer is:
No. The correct answer is
You mustYes!
C:\Documents
No. The
The the
answer
and
correct
correct answer
answer
question
Settings\All
is
is
before
Users\Application
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
not -
answer
answered
-Click
Click
C:\Documents and anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
Settings\All Users\Application
continuing
Data\Honeywell\Experion
Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Checkpoint
PKS\Checkpoint
Click
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue
continue
Submit Clear

Control Builder Introduction 451 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Locating the Checkpoint File

• Saving Checkpoint Files

• Checkpoint support

• Comparing System Parameters

Control Builder Introduction 452 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Automatic Checkpointing Honeywell
Controller > Checkpoint > Schedule Checkpoint Task

CLICK

Control Builder Introduction 453 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Automatic Checkpointing Honeywell

Name task

Select Controller(s)

Assign Controller(s)

Control Builder Introduction 454 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Saving a Checkpoint File Honeywell
• A checkpoint file can be saved two ways:

– Automatically

– Manually

Control Builder Introduction 455 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Automatic Checkpointing Honeywell

Select automatic

Select interval

Control Builder Introduction 456 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Automatic Checkpointing Honeywell

NOTE: The number of versions is grayed

out in this case because the QVCS option Add number of versions
was included with this system. to be retained
QVCS only permits 1 version to be retained.
Add comment

CLICK

Control Builder Introduction 457 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Automatic Checkpointing Honeywell
• Checkpoint Scheduler

Start Stop

Define task Refresh Contents

Edit task Delete Task

Control Builder Introduction 458 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Manual Checkpointing Honeywell

CLICK

Control Builder Introduction 459 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Question 2: Saving a Checkpoint File Honeywell
Which statement about saving a checkpoint file is false?
A) If your system has the QVCS option, you will only
be able to save 1 version of the checkpoint file
automatically; otherwise, you can specify the
number of versions to save
B) The checkpoint scheduler shows a list of the
automatic and manual checkpoints that have been
saved
C) You can save a checkpoint file manually for only one
project node
D) When you save a checkpoint file automatically you
must specify the start date, start time and interval

Yourcorrect
The answer: answer is:
YouCorrect!
must
No. answer
No. The
TheThe
false
falsethe
false questionis
statement
statement
statement isbefore
is
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
"You
"You can save aacontinuing
can save checkpoint
checkpoint file
file manually
manually
for
for only
only one
one project
project node."
node."

Click
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue.
continue.
Submit Clear

Control Builder Introduction 460 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Locating the Checkpoint File

• Saving Checkpoint Files

• Checkpoint support
• Comparing System Parameters

Control Builder Introduction 461 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Checkpoint support for C300, Series C I/O, & PM I/O Honeywell
• C300 target and save granularity
– C300 CEE with Series A modules supported on C300
– Series C I/O
– PMIO supported on C300

Control Builder Introduction 462 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
C300 Restore Honeywell
• Restore from single “C300 Checkpoint file”

C300 selected
“restore C300 & I/0”

Control Builder Introduction 463 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
C300 and Series A IO Modules Restore Honeywell

Restore C300

Control Builder Introduction 464 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Series C IO and PM IO Restore Honeywell

One or more Series C

IOM(s) selected
“Restore IOM(s)”

One or more PM
IOP(s) selected
“Restore IOP(s)”

Control Builder Introduction 465 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
C200 and Series A IO Modules Restore Honeywell
• C200 Save
– Series A I/O
– PM IO

C200

Series A I/O

C200_latest.cp or previously saved

compatible file
PM IO

C200 selected
“restore C200 & I/0”

Control Builder Introduction 466 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
LIOM Checkpoint Support Honeywell
• LIOM Controller
– Redundant or Non-Redundant configuration
– LIOM Block, the LIOM CEE, 621 IOMs, and its contained CMs

Save / restore

Latest.cp

LIOM

621 IOM 621 IOM

621 IOM 621 IOM

Control Builder Introduction 467 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
OPC Gateway Checkpoint Support Honeywell
• The OPC Gateway is a CPM-like Function Block that resides on an ACE
Node and provides configuration parameters necessary for OPC
connections from ACE CEEs.

• If the ACE Node that hosts the OPC gateway should fail, the OPC
Gateway Checkpoint file can be used to restore these configuration
parameters.

OPC gateway

OPC Gateway latest.cp

ACE Restore

Control Builder Introduction 468 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Detail Display Honeywell
• The System Status Display supports direct navigation to the detail
display for a selected node
– Checkpoint save and restore operations from the checkpoint TAB in the
detail display

Control Builder Introduction 469 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Question 3: Checkpoint Functions Honeywell
Which of the following statements is true about Checkpoints?
A) C300 checkpoints are stored in a single file
B) PM and Series C IOM can be restored individually,
when connected to C300
C) C200 checkpoints if used, restores the C200 and all
IOMs
D) Series A I/O connected to C300 cannot be restored
individually
E) All of the above

Yourcorrect
The answer: answer is:
Yes!
No. All
All of
of the
the above
above statements
statements areare true
true
You must answer
about the question before
Checkpoints.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

Control Builder Introduction 470 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Locating the Checkpoint File

• Saving Checkpoint Files

• Checkpoint support


• Comparing System Parameters

Control Builder Introduction 471 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Using Compare Parameters Honeywell
Tools > System Preferences

Control Builder Introduction 472 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Compare Parameters Honeywell
CM_FV101RC loading from Project tab

Uncheck if PVHIALM is to remain at 87 in C200, and then be sure

to perform an Upload to Monitoring and an Update to Project!

Control Builder Introduction 473 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Question 4: Comparing Parameters Honeywell
When the Compare Parameters function is active:
A) The Compare Parameters checkbox in the
Tools > System Preferences window is checked
B) Control Builder will inform you of any parameter
discrepancies between the control module you are
loading and the control module which resides on the
controller
C) Control Builder will give you the option to keep
certain parameter values on the controller or
overwrite them with new values
D) All of the above

The correct
Your answer: answer is:
Yes!
No.You
All
Allmust
these
theseanswer
statements
statements are
are correct
correct
the question when
when the
before the
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
Compare Parameters
continuing function is active.

Click anywhere to continue. Submit Clear

Control Builder Introduction 474 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• The Checkpoint function in Control Builder:

– Saves and restores operational and configuration data

– Speeds recovery from process or hardware anomalies
– Can be done manually or automatically at set intervals
• The Compare Parameters function in Control Builder:

– Compares parameters from function blocks in your ERDB with parameters

from function blocks in your controller, giving you the opportunity to keep or
write over existing values

Control Builder Introduction 475 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing

& Compare Parameters

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Control Builder Introduction 476 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify Functionality of Checkpointing and Compare Parameters 7/5/2023
 Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB

Control Builder Introduction 477 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn to locate
information about Control Builder
components in Knowledge Builder

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will

know how to:

– Find function block information and

theory in Knowledge Builder

– Find parameter information in

Knowledge Builder

Control Builder Introduction 478 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB 7/5/2023
Knowledge Builder Location Honeywell

Control Builder Introduction 479 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB 7/5/2023
Function Blocks in Knowledge Builder Honeywell
Experion PKS R300.0 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control > Regulatory Control Blocks

Control Builder Introduction 480 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB 7/5/2023
PID Block Theory Honeywell
Experion PKS R300.0 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control > PID Block

PID
Theory

Control Builder Introduction 481 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB 7/5/2023
Parameter Reference Honeywell
Experion PKS R300.0 > Reference > Control Builder Parameter Reference

Control Builder Introduction 482 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB 7/5/2023
Question 1: Knowledge Builder Parameter Information Honeywell
Where can you find information in Knowledge Builder for the CVEUHI
parameter on a PID function block?
A) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Components Reference> CXXXX Parameters
B) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Components Theory> CXXXX Parameters
C) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Parameter Reference> CXXXX Parameters
D) None of the above

TheNo.
Your The correct
correct
answer:answerpath is: to find information for the CVEUHI
Yes!
No. The
The correct
correct path
path to
to find
find information
information for
for the
the CVEUHI
CVEUHI
parameter
You onanswer
must a PIDA the
function block
question in Knowledge Builder is
before
parameter noton
YouExperion
Incorrect
Correct
did You a PIDA
-answer
answered
-Click
Click function
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
questionblock
correctly!
to
to in Knowledge Builder is
continue
continue
completely
PKS> Reference> Control Builder Parameter
Experion PKS>continuing
Reference> Control Builder Parameter
Reference> CXXXX Parameters
Reference> CXXXX Parameters
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

Control Builder Introduction 483 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• Read Knowledge Builder to learn about the components you will use to
create control modules including:

– Function block information and theory

(Experion PKS R300.0 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control)

– Parameter information
(Experion PKS R300.0 > Reference > Control Builder Parameter Reference)

Control Builder Introduction 484 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe How to Locate CB Information in KB

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Open and Operate Control Builder lab exercise

Control Builder Introduction 485 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Control Builder Introduction 486 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB 7/5/2023
 HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 487 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will have an understanding of each
lab practice and an example of the completed labs for reference

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 488 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
List of Labs 1 - 10 Honeywell

• Lab 1: Use Experion PKS HMIWeb Display Builder - Tab 5

• Lab 2: Build the Static Parts of the Displays -Tab 7
• Lab 3: Add Indicator Objects to the Displays - Tab 8
• Lab 4: Create and Add Shape Sequences to a Display - Tab 9
• Lab 5: Create Simple Dynamic Shapes - Tab 10
• Lab 6: Create Complex Dynamic Shapes - Tab 10
• Lab 7: Create Dynamic Shapes for Analog Indicators - Tab 10
• Lab 8: Create a Dynamic Shape for Loop Operation - Tab 10
• Lab 9: Create and Apply a Cascade Style Sheet - Tab 11
• Lab 10: Modify a Shortcut Menu - Tab 12

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 489 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
List of Labs 11 - 20 Honeywell

• Lab 11: Create a Popup Display - Tab 13

• Lab 12: Create Trend Displays -Tab 14
• Lab 13: Create a Script to Restrict Operator Action - Tab 15
• Lab 14: Create a Temperature Profile Display - Tab 15
• Lab 15: Use the Script Data Tab - Tab 15
• Lab 16: Use System Custom Properties - Tab 15
• Lab 17: Create a Startup Script (Optional) - Tab 16
• Lab 18: Create Navigation Buttons - Tab 17
• Lab 19: Create a Safeview File (RoundRobin) - Tab 18
• Lab 20: Create a Safeview File (FirstMatch) - Tab 18

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 490 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Final T_100 Example Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 491 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Final D_100 Example Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 492 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Final E_100 Example Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 493 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Final Tank Farm Project Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 494 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Final Overview Project Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 495 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 1: HMIWeb Display Builder - Practice Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 496 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 1: Generate Display Reports Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 497 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 2: Build Static Parts of T_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 498 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 2: Build Static Parts of D_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 499 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 2: Build Static Parts of E_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 500 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 3: Add Indicator Objects to T_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 501 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 3: Add Indicator Objects to D_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 502 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 4: Shape Sequences – D_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 503 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 4: Upgrade and Replace Embedded Shapes Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 504 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 4: Upgrade and Replace Embedded Shapes Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 505 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 5: Simple Dynamic Shapes – D_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 506 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 6: Complex Dynamic Shapes – T_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 507 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 6: Complex Dynamic Shapes – D_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 508 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 6: Complex Dynamic Shapes – E_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 509 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 7: Dynamic Shape Indicators – T_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 510 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 7: Dynamic Shape Indicators – D_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 511 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 7: Dynamic Shape Indicators – E_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 512 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 8: DS for Loop Operation – T_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 513 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 8: DS for Loop Operation – D_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 514 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 8: DS for Loop Operation – E_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 515 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 9: Cascade Style Sheet – E_100_CSS Honeywell

Logo
added New text
properties
applied

Breakpoint
animation

Background
color
changed

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 516 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 10: Modify a Shortcut Menu – D_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 517 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 11: Create a Popup Display – D_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 518 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 12: Create Trend Displays – T_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 519 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 12: Create Trend Displays – D_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 520 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 12: Create Trend Displays – E_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 521 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 13: Script to Restrict Operator Action Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 522 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 14: Temperature Profile – T_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 523 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 15: Use the Script Data Tab – T_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 524 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 16: System Custom Properties Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 525 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 17: Create a Startup Script – T_100 Honeywell

Optiona
l Lab
Exercis
e

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 526 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 18: Create Navigation Buttons – T_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 527 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 18: Create Navigation Buttons – D_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 528 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 18: Create Navigation Buttons – E_100 Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 529 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 19: SafeView (Round Robin) Honeywell

Window 1 Window 2

Window 4 Window 3

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 530 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Lab 20: SafeView (First Match) Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 531 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the lab exercises to begin building your displays

HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 532 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
HMIWeb Display Builder Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
 Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise 533 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• This lesson introduces you to the control modules you will build later in
the course using Control Builder

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise 534 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Data Acquisition – TI20 Honeywell

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise 535 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
PID – FC01 Honeywell

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise 536 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
PID Split Range Outputs – PC16 Honeywell

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise 537 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Cascade PID – LC14 and FC17 Honeywell

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise 538 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Cascade PID with 2 Secondaries LC 14 , FC17 and FC18 Honeywell

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise 539 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Device Control – Pumps Honeywell

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise 540 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Device Control – Fans Honeywell

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise 541 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Process Simulation for Lab Exercise 542 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence 7/5/2023
 Describe Indicator Element Properties

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 543 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson you will be able to:
– Create an Indicator in HMIWeb Display Builder
– Configure Indicator properties

Indicator
object

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 544 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Indicator types and Properties

• Creating an Indicator in HMIWeb Display Builder

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 545 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Indicator Type Honeywell
• The Indicator type specifies how the object is displayed.
• The Indicator type can be a:
– Bar Bar Pointer

– Pointer

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 546 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Indicator Orientation Honeywell
• Orientation designates whether the indicator moves vertically or
horizontally
• Defined in the Details tab of the object
Vertical

Horizontal

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 547 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Positive Direction Honeywell
• The Positive Direction represents the fill direction

• If the Orientation of the Indicator is

Vertical, the positive direction options:
– Up Up
– Down
Down

• If the Orientation of the Indicator

is Horizontal, the positive direction is:
– Right
Right
– Left

Left

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 548 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Range Honeywell
• Range is configured on the Details tab
– High: Upper boundary of the indicator object
– Low: Lower boundary of the indicator object
– Origin: The fill starting point of the indicator
• The values configured for the Origin, High and Low ranges are constant
values and can be greater then 100 and less then zero
High

Origin

Low

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 549 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Animation Honeywell
• Color changes are based on the change in value or status of the
associated Point/Parameter/Database File.

• Animation can be configured to be

– Continuous
– Discrete
– None

• Breakpoint Animation for an Indicator

can now be done using a Cascade
Style Sheet

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 550 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Animation – Tag state Honeywell
• Animation colors can indicate
– Alarm state
– Off-scan
– Bad value
– NaN

• Alarm state:
– When checked, Station
overrides the current Level Fill
color with the appropriate
system-defined color

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 551 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Alarm State Honeywell
• Alarm state fill color can be set based on System alarm priority
• Click Configure > System Hardware > Server Wide Settings
– Alarm Colors Tab

Level fill colors will

change based on the
Server-wide Alarm
colors if this box is
checked

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 552 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Off-Scan Honeywell
• Off-scan State: Level fill color is
overwritten by the system-defined
off-scan color

– The system defined color for a

Point Off-Scan is Gray

– Can only be used for SCADA points

Off-Scan color for a

SCADA point

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 553 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Bad Value Honeywell
• Bad Value: Fill color can be overwritten by the system-defined color

– The System defined color for the “Indicate BAD

State with color” option is Blue

Bad State Color defined in

C:\Windows\station.ini file

Normal System
Level Fill Defined
Color Bad State
Color

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 554 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
NaN State Honeywell
• NaN stands for Not a Number
– Level fill color can be overwritten by the system-defined color
– The system-defined color for NaN State is Magenta
– Can be changed in the station.ini file

System defined NaN State Color defined

NaN State Color in the station.ini file

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 555 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Indicator types and Properties


• Creating an Indicator in HMIWeb Display Builder

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 556 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Lab Example Honeywell
• Select the Indicator icon on the toolbar and add it to the custom display
as shown.

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 557 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Lab Example Honeywell
• Also add an Indicator to the D_100 display and configure its properties

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 558 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When creating indicator objects, remember:

– An Indicator can be a Bar or Pointer type

– The Indicator orientation can be Horizontal or Vertical
– The Positive direction for a indicator, which is the level fill direction, can be
UP/Down for a Vertical Orientation or Right/Left for a Horizontal Orientation

– The range for an indicator is specified as High and Low and the origin can
also be defined. The values can be less then zero and greater then 100.
The range is a percentage of the actual value

– The• Alarm
indicator can display the following properties:
state with color
• Off-scan state with color
• Bad value with color
• NaN State with color

Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 559 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe Indicator Element Properties

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the lab exercise to add indicators to

your class projects.
Intro. to HMIWeb Display Builder Dynamics 560 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Describe Indicator Element Properties 7/5/2023
 Describe the Configuration of C200
Hardware and I/O

C200 Hardware Configuration 561 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn to configure C200 hardware and I/O using
Control Builder

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:

– Identify C200 hardware, slot numbers and addressing

– Configure and download hardware configurations for these components

C200 Hardware Configuration 562 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Hardware and Slot Numbers


• Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE


• Configuring IOMs


• Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs


• Activating a CEE

C200 Hardware Configuration 563 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
C200 Chassis Hardware Honeywell
• Below is an example C200 chassis configured with:
1 10-slot chassis 5 IO Link Interface Module
2 Power supply 6 Fieldbus Interface Module
3 ControlNet Interface (CNI) 7 Redundancy Module
or FTE Bridge
4 Control Processor (C200) 8 CNI to Remote I/O

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

C200 Hardware Configuration 564 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
C200 I/O Slot Numbers Honeywell
• To determine the slot location of C200 related hardware you must:

– Start counting at zero (do not count the power supply)

– Count from left to right

– Count both spaces if the module occupies two spaces

0 5
Power Supply 1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9

C200 Hardware Configuration 565 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Hardware and Slot Numbers


• Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE

• Configuring IOMs

• Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs

• Activating a CEE

C200 Hardware Configuration 566 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB) Honeywell
• Single-wide chassis module

• Connects to FTE cable A and B

• Supports chassis redundancy

• Can only be used for Supervisory

Control Network connection

• ControlNet and downlink CNIs

required for all I/O communications
including peer-to-peer to AB devices

• Rotary switch for FTE Node Number (1 to 99)

– IP address of FTEB can be set to higher than 99 by configuring the Base IP

address accordingly from System Preferences option

C200 Hardware Configuration 567 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB), contd. Honeywell
• The FTEB can be used for FIM-only connections to the supervisory
network

• In the Project and Monitoring tabs in Control Builder you will see the
FTEB as the root for the CPM

• You will set up the FTEB using IP addresses

• An FTE community can only have 99 FTEBs so you are limited to 49

redundant pairs and 99 single FTEBs in one community

• The FTE connection to the FTEB is 10Mbps

– 10Mbps is only supported in FTE for connection from an FTEB to a switch

and nowhere else

C200 Hardware Configuration 568 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring a FTEB Honeywell

C200 Hardware Configuration 569 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Question 1: FTEB Node Numbering Honeywell
Which of the following is not a valid FTEB node number?
A) 110
B) 99
C) 257
D) 1

The correct
Your answer: answer is:
No. '257' is not a valid FTEB node number.
FTEBYouIPmust answer
address can the
be question
set to before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis tohigher
question
correctly!
to then 99
continue
continue
completely
by configuring the continuing
base IP address accordingly
in System Preferences in Control Builder.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C200 Hardware Configuration 570 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring a Controller Honeywell

Follow these steps to add

a new control processor
module (CPM) from the
pull-down menus

C200 Hardware Configuration 571 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring a Controller – CPM Main Tab Honeywell
• Data entry details
will be provided in Tag Name &
the lab exercise Item Name

ControlNet or Ethernet driver

Driver Name
CNI slot #
MAC ID of CNI Slot number of CPM
Card connected
to server
Alarm reporting by
CEE

Check for the redundant controller

and then enter its name

C200 Hardware Configuration 572 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring a Controller – CPM Main Tab, contd. Honeywell
• Data entry details
will be provided in
the lab exercise Ethernet Network

Driver Name

Slot Number of CPM

Redundant Controller &

Name

C200 Hardware Configuration 573 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring a Controller – Server History Tab Honeywell
• History parameters and control level required to operate this CPM

C200 Hardware Configuration 574 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring a Controller – Group and Trend Assignment Honeywell

Point, group, trend and

associated displays (that
reside on the server) are
defined on the Server
Displays tab

Select OK to close and

save the new controller

C200 Hardware Configuration 575 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Question 2: Supervisory MAC Address for a CPM Honeywell
While configuring a ControlNet connected
control processor module (CPM) in Control
Builder, which MAC address is entered as
the Supervisory MAC address?
A) The device index of FTEB card

B) The MAC address of the PCIC card

C) The MAC address of CNI card

connected to the I/O rack
D) The MAC address of CNI card
connected to server

Yourcorrect
The answer: answer is:
You must
Incorrect.
Correct! The
The answer the question
Supervisory
Supervisory MAC
MAC beforeisisthe
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis toaddress
question address
correctly!
to continue
continue
completely theMAC
MAC
continuing
address of the CNI card connected to the server.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C200 Hardware Configuration 576 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring a CEE – CPM/CEE Tree View Honeywell

Click the + sign to expand

the CPM in the Project tab

Double-click to open the

configuration form

C200 Hardware Configuration 577 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring a CEE – Main Tab Honeywell

Data entry details

will be provided in
the Lab exercise

C200 Hardware Configuration 578 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring C200 Hardware Honeywell
• The Control Processor Module (CPM) and its Control Execution
Environment (CEE) are configured but not yet downloaded

C200 Hardware Configuration 579 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Hardware and Slot Numbers

• Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE


• Configuring IOMs

• Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs

• Activating a CEE

C200 Hardware Configuration 580 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring Input/Output Modules (IOMs) Honeywell

Menu
method

C200 Hardware Configuration 581 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring IOMs Honeywell

Control Builder
Automatically
Names the IOM

C200 Hardware Configuration 582 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Configuring IOMs, contd. Honeywell

Module slot number

MAC address of the remote

rack’s CNI card

Slot number of the CNI in

the processor rack through
which this card will
communicate

C200 Hardware Configuration 583 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Assigning IOMs Honeywell

1 2
3

Assigned
to CEE

C200 Hardware Configuration 584 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Question 3: Configuring an IOM Honeywell
Before loading an IOM, it must be:

A) Activated
B) Assigned
C) Renamed
D) Validated

Yourcorrect
The answer: answer is:
You must answer the question before
Incorrect.
Correct!
You notBefore
Incorrect
Correct
did You Before
-answer you
answered
-Click
Clickyoucan
can
anywhere
anywhere
this
this load
load
questionIOMs,
IOMs,
correctly!
to
to they
theymust
continue
continue mustbe
completely be
continuing
assigned to the Control Execution Environment.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C200 Hardware Configuration 585 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Hardware and Slot Numbers

• Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE

• Configuring IOMs


• Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs

• Activating a CEE

C200 Hardware Configuration 586 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs Honeywell

Not yet
loaded

C200 Hardware Configuration 587 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs, contd. Honeywell

Verify that the

items to load
are checked

Note:
You can decide to
have the modules
go to the active
state automatically
by clicking this
checkbox, with the
Post Load State
selected, to be
“Active”

C200 Hardware Configuration 588 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Hardware and Slot Numbers

• Configuring the FTEB, Controller and CEE

• Configuring IOMs

• Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs


• Activating a CEE

C200 Hardware Configuration 589 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Activating a Control Strategy Honeywell

Double-click CEE

Select Cold Start

C200 Hardware Configuration 590 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Activating a Control Strategy, contd. Honeywell

Click Yes

Blue: The object is not running (inactive)

Green: The object is running (active)
Red: Communication failure

C200 Hardware Configuration 591 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When configuring and loading C200 hardware and I/O in Control Builder,
remember:

– To determine the IOM slot number of hardware in the C200 chassis, start
counting at zero, but do not count the power supply, count from left to right
and count both spaces, if the module occupies two spaces

– An FTEB node number can be set to higher than 99

– The Supervisory MAC address of the CPM is the MAC address of the CNI
card connected to the server

– Before loading the Control Processor Module (CPM), its Control Execution
Environment (CEE), and I/O modules (IOMs):

• Configure the CPM, its CEE and I/O modules (IOMs)

• Assign the IOMs to the CEE

C200 Hardware Configuration 592 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

C200 Hardware Configuration 593 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

C200 Hardware Configuration 594 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O 7/5/2023
 Describe the Import/Export Procedure in
Control Builder

C200 Hardware Configuration 595 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn to import
and export control strategy
configurations from one server to
another

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you

will be able to:

– Describe how to export control

strategy configurations from a
Control Builder project

– Describe how to import control

strategy configurations into a Control
Builder project

C200 Hardware Configuration 596 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder - Export Honeywell
• The Export function lets you • The exported portions or all of the
export all or a portion of the ERDB are stored in the Ixport folder
ERDB viewed in the Project at directory location
Tree to the Ixport folder or a – C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion
user-defined location PKS\Engineering Tools (by default)

C200 Hardware Configuration 597 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder – Import/Export Honeywell
CM, SCM and hardware configurations can be moved between servers
using the Import/Export function
Control Builder Control Builder
(Server 1) (Server 2)

Control Control
Strategy Strategy
Configuration Configuration

Project Project
Tree Tree

Export Import
Data Data

Ixport Directory

C200 Hardware Configuration 598 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder – Export Honeywell
• In Control Builder, select File > Export to call up the dialog box shown:

All items in
current project
All items in use selection
Current project buttons (or use
<Ctl> + mouse
select or
<Shift> +
mouse select to
Import\Export export specific
text files target CMs from the
location point window)

List of items to
Export based
on selections
Select to start export from window
(Export.sl)

C200 Hardware Configuration 599 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder – Export, contd. Honeywell

Exporting Data Dialog Box

C200 Hardware Configuration 600 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder 7/5/2023
Control Builder – Import Honeywell
• In Control Builder, select File > Import to call up the dialog box shown:
Use selection
buttons (or use
All items in Current <Ctl> + mouse
Import/Export text select or <Shift> +
Files location mouse select to
import specific
CMs from the
Import\Export text Point window)
Files target location
List of items to
Import based on
Selections from
Import and Assign Window (Import.sl)

When enabled,
Select to start Import Your own list of
items to import
(Filename.sl)

C200 Hardware Configuration 601 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder 7/5/2023
Question 1: Importing and Exporting Honeywell
Which of the following statements best describes the import/export function?
A) Only the hardware configuration
can be moved between servers
B) CMs, SCMs, and the hardware
configuration can be copied and
restored to another server
C) Only CMs can be moved between
servers
D) None of the above

Yourcorrect
The answer:answer is:
You mustCMs,
answer theand
question before
YouIncorrect.
Correct!
Correct
Incorrect
did You CMs,
ClickSCMs
not -answer
-Click
answered SCMs
anywhere and
anywhere
thisthis the
the
to hardware
hardware
tocontinue
question continue
correctly!
completely
configuration can continuing
be copied and restored to
another server.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C200 Hardware Configuration 602 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• The Import/Export function in Control Builder:

– Allows you to copy CM, SCM, and hardware configurations from one
server’s ERDB to another server’s ERDB

C200 Hardware Configuration 603 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Configure C200 Hardware in a Simulation Control

Environment (SCE) and Import the Remaining I/O Modules into the SCE
lab exercises

C200 Hardware Configuration 604 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder 7/5/2023
 How to Build Shape Sequences

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 605 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Create a Shape Sequence
Shape
Sequence

– Insert, upgrade and replace Shapes

in a process display

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 606 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building and Grouping Guidelines

• Using the “Bad Value” Option
• Creating a Shape Sequence
• Inserting a Shape Sequence into a process display
• Upgrading/Replacing Embedded Shapes

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 607 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Building Shape Sequences Honeywell
• Shape Sequences

Status Indicators

Animation

C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\HMIWeb Display Builder\ShapeLib

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 608 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Building and Grouping Guidelines Honeywell
• Building and grouping Shape Sequences

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 609 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Left to Right (Analog) Honeywell
• Left to right using an analog value

0-100 101-200 201-300 301-400 401-500 501-600 601-700

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 610 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Left to Right (Status) Honeywell

• Left to right using a Status point

State 0 State 1 State 2 State 3 State 4 State 5 State 6 State 7

Note: The number of shapes in a Shape Sequence display must be equal to or

greater than the number of states for the point type it will be associated with.

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 611 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Grouping Example Honeywell
• Example: - Shape Grouping and Arrangement
– Each shape in a Shape Sequence must be grouped

Arrange shapes from left to right

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 612 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Status Point Example Honeywell
• Shape Sequence with two shapes

Red - represents State “0”

Green - represents State “1”

Remember: Left to right, and each shape must be a single object or grouped.

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 613 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Animation Example Honeywell
• Example:
– Animating a Shape Sequence with scripts

For details, see “Creating an Animation with a Shape Sequence”

in the display help files or in Knowledge Builder

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 614 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building and Grouping Guidelines


• Using the “Bad Value” Option

• Creating a Shape Sequence

• Inserting a Shape Sequence into a process display

• Upgrading/Replacing Embedded Shapes

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 615 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Bad Value Option Honeywell
• Using the “Bad Value” option

Bad Value State 0 State 1 State 2 State 3 State 4 State 5 State 6 State 7

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 616 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building and Grouping Guidelines

• Using the “Bad Value” Option


• Creating a Shape Sequence

• Inserting a Shape Sequence into a process display

• Upgrading/Replacing Embedded Shapes

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 617 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Creating a Shape Sequence Honeywell


• Select File > New > Shape Sequence

• Or use the display icon

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 618 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Adding Objects Honeywell
• Arrange shapes in the appropriate order
• Group each shape, if necessary

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 619 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Registering a Shape Folder Honeywell
• Tools > Options
– Select the Shape tab

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 620 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Dynamic Objects in Shape Sequences Honeywell

• Minimize the use of dynamic objects

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 621 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building and Grouping Guidelines

• Using the “Bad Value” Option

• Creating a Shape Sequence


• Inserting a Shape Sequence into a process display

• Upgrading/Replacing Embedded Shapes

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 622 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Insert a Shape Sequence – Icon Method Honeywell


• Using the Insert Shape icon

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 623 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Insert Shape Dialog Box Honeywell
• Select the Shape Sequence you want to insert

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 624 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Shape Sequence Inserted Honeywell
• Inserting a Shape Sequence

Move and resize the shape as necessary.

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 625 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Insert a Shape Sequence – Menu Method Honeywell


• Using the pull-down menus

Move and resize the shape as necessary.

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 626 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Properties - Behaviors Tab Honeywell
• Shape Sequence Behaviors Tab

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 627 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Properties - Data Tab Honeywell
• Shape Sequence Data Tab

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 628 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Properties - Animation Tab Honeywell
• Shape Sequence Animation Tab

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 629 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building and Grouping Guidelines

• Using the “Bad Value” Option

• Creating a Shape Sequence

• Inserting a Shape Sequence into a process display


• Upgrading/Replacing Embedded Shapes

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 630 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Upgrade Embedded Shapes Honeywell
• To upgrade an embedded shape:

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 631 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Upgrade Embedded Shapes Honeywell
• Select Upgrade

• A Successful upgrade dialog box appears

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 632 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Replace Embedded Shapes Honeywell
• To replace an Embedded Shape with a different shape:

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 633 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Replace Embedded Shapes Honeywell
• Complete the Replace Shapes Dialog box: All display shapes
are listed in a drop-
down list

Browse to the
new Shape file

Uncheck to retain the

original shape size

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 634 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Replace Embedded Shapes Honeywell
• Your embedded shape is replaced

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 635 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Display Builder Assistant Honeywell
• Using the Display Builder Assistant to Replace Shapes

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 636 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Bulk Shape Replacement Honeywell
• Shape replacement across many displays

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 637 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Bulk Shape Replacement Honeywell
• Replacement Complete

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 638 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Replace Shape Comparison Honeywell
• To compare the Replace Shape functions –
– If doing a one-on-one shape replacement using the Replace Shapes option
on the Tools pull-down menu, your display with the shape to be replaced is
open and the shape "visibly" gets replaced in the graphic in HMIWeb Display
Builder. After saving the display and calling the graphic in Station, the new
shape is shown.

• In contrast:
– The Display Builder Assistant should be used as a bulk "background"
replace. Due to the functionality of Display Builder Assistant Replace
Shapes, it is recommended that the tool be used without any of the affected
files open. If a graphic is open and the Display Builder Assistant is used for
the replacement of shapes in that graphic as well as other displays, the
old/replaced shapes remain visible in the display that is open in HMIWeb
Display Builder - the new shape is not shown. When the page is called in
Station, the new shape is there as long as the display was NOT saved in
HMIWeb Display Builder.

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 639 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Bulk Shape Upgrade Honeywell
• In the Display Builder Assistant click Upgrade Embedded Shapes
– Enter the display folder where the displays are stored

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 640 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Upgrade Embedded Shape Comparison Honeywell
• To compare the Upgrade Shape functions –
– If doing an embedded shape upgrade using the Upgrade Embedded Shapes
option on the Tools pull-down menu, your display with the shape to be
upgraded is open and the shape gets upgraded in the graphic in HMIWeb
Display Builder. After saving the display and calling the graphic in Station,
the new shape is shown.

• In contrast:
– The Display Builder Assistant should be used as a bulk "background“
upgrade. Due to the functionality of Display Builder Assistant Upgrade
Embedded Shapes, it is strongly recommended that the tool be used without
any of the affected files open. If a graphic is open and the Display Builder
Assistant is used for upgrading of embedded shapes in that graphic as well
as other displays, the old/replaced embedded shapes remain visible in the
display that is open in HMIWeb Display Builder - the new shape is not
shown. When the page is called in Station, the new shape is there as long
as the display was NOT saved in HMIWeb Display Builder.

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 641 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When building and using Shape Sequences:

– Group each shape if it is made up of multiple objects

– Minimize dynamics
– Arrange shapes left to right
– Include enough shapes to be equal to or greater than the number of
parameter states

– If the “Bad Value” option is checked, the second shape represents State 0
– Remember to modify the Properties of the Shape Sequence after insertion
into your process display for proper operation

– Use the upgrade/replace shape features

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 642 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Lab Example: Shape Sequences Honeywell
• Pump Shape Sequences

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 643 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Lab Example: Upgrade Embedded Shapes Honeywell
• Upgrade P62 Pumps

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 644 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Lab Example: Replace Embedded Shapes Honeywell
• Replace Embedded Shapes

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 645 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe How to Build Shape Sequences

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Shape Sequence lab exercise

Shape Sequences in HMIWeb Display Builder 646 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
How to Build Shape Sequences 7/5/2023
 Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration

C300 Configuration 647 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn to configure C300 Controller and
Series C I/O
• PMIO configuration is discussed in a separate lesson
• The steps for configuration are similar to the C200 configuration with
some differences:
– Add a new Control Processor Module to the Project hierarchy
• Control Builder adds the CEE and two IOLINK modules
– Configure the Controller
– Configure the CEE
– Configure the IOLINKs (PMIO or Series C IO)
– Configure the IOMs
– Assign the IOMs to the IOLINKs
– Load the Controller, CEE, IOLINKS, and the IOPs
– Activate the CEE

C300 Configuration 648 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Configuring the C300 and CEE

• Configuring IOLINKs
• Configuring IOMs
• Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs
• Activating the C300

C300 Configuration 649 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Configuring a Controller Honeywell

Follow these steps to add a new

controller from the pull-down menus

C300 Configuration 650 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Configuring a Controller – Main Tab Honeywell

Data entry
details will be Item name
provided in the
lab exercise

Device index Number of C300 Check for redundant controller

C300 Configuration 651 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Configuring a Controller – Server History Tab Honeywell

History parameters and control level required to operate this C300

C300 Configuration 652 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Configuring a Controller – Group and Trend Assignment Honeywell

Point, group, trend and

associated displays
(residing on the server)
are defined on the
Server Displays tab

Select OK to close and

save the new controller

C300 Configuration 653 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
C300 View in Control Builder Honeywell

C300, CEE, and

IOLINKs

Redundancy

C300 Configuration 654 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Configuring a CEE Honeywell

Data entry details

will be provided in
the Lab exercise

C300 Configuration 655 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Question 1: C300 Configuration Honeywell
Which of the following statements is not true for C300 configuration?
A) Device Index number specified on the C300
IOTA needs to be specified
B) 2 IOLINKs are automatically created
C) Only one IOLINK is automatically created for
Series C I/O
D) 5ms Base Execution Period is supported for
non-redundant C300 configuration

The
Yourcorrect
answer: answer is:
Incorrect.
You mustThe falsethe
answer statement
questionisbefore
"Only one
YouIncorrect
did You
Correct!
IOLINK not
Correct
is - Click
answer
answered anywhere
thisthis
-automatically
When Click anywhere
acontinuing
C300 to
question continue
correctly!
completely
to continue
controller
created for
is created
Series Cin
Control
I/O".
I/O".When
When
Builderaa C300
C300
2 IOLINKS
controller
controller
are is
automatically
is created
created in
in
Control Builder 2 IOLINKS
added. are automatically
added.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

C300 Configuration 656 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Configuring the C300 and CEE

• Configuring IOLINKs
• Configuring IOMs

• Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs

• Activating the C300

C300 Configuration 657 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
IOLINK Configuration – Link 1 Honeywell

I/O family selection

I/O Link number 1 Cable - Gray

C300 Configuration 658 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
IOLINK Configuration – Link 2 Honeywell

I/O Link number 2 Cable - Violet

C300 Configuration 659 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Configuring C300 Hardware Honeywell
• The Control Processor Module (CPM) and its Control Execution
Environment (CEE) are now configured but not yet downloaded

C300 Configuration 660 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Question 2: IOLINK Configuration Honeywell
Which of the following items are specified during IOLINK configuration?

A) Series C or PM IO, one type on each IOLINK

B) Series A I/O type
C) Whether Series C and PM IO is to be used on
the same IOLINK

The correct
Your answer: answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect. When
When configuring
You must answerconfiguring an
anIOLINK
the questionIOLINK only
onlyone
before one
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -
answer
answered
-Click
Click
type of IO family anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
can be connected to each
continuing
IOLINK i.e. Series C or PM IO, one type on each
link.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Configuration 661 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Configuring the C300 and CEE

• Configuring IOLINKs

• Configuring IOMs
• Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs

• Activating the C300

C300 Configuration 662 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Configuring Series_C_IO Honeywell

Menu method

C300 Configuration 663 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Configuring Series_C_IO, contd. Honeywell

1 2

Control Builder
automatically
names the IOM

C300 Configuration 664 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Configuring Series_C_IO, contd. Honeywell

IOM number

C300 Configuration 665 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Assigning Series_C_IO Honeywell

2 1
3

Assigned
to CEE

C300 Configuration 666 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Configuring the C300 and CEE

• Configuring IOLINKs

• Configuring IOMs

• Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs

• Activating the C300

C300 Configuration 667 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs Honeywell

Not yet
loaded

C300 Configuration 668 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs, contd. Honeywell

Verify that the

items to load
are checked

Note:
You can decide
to have the
modules go to
the active state
automatically by
clicking this
checkbox with
the Post Load
State selected to
be “Active”

C300 Configuration 669 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Question 3: IOP Configuration Honeywell
Assigned I/O modules appear under:

A) Unassigned tree in Project tab

B) IOLINK tree in Project tab
C) Directly under the CEE tree in Project tab

The correct
Your answer:answer is:
Correct! The assigned I/O modules appear
You must
Incorrect
You answer
-Click
Click
answered the question
anywhere to before
continue
Incorrect.
You Correct
did -The
notthe
under answer thisthis
assigned
anywhere
IOLINK correctly!
I/O
question
tree modules
into continueappear
completely
Project tab.
continuing
under the IOLINK tree in Project tab.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

C300 Configuration 670 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Configuring the C300 and CEE

• Configuring IOLINKs

• Configuring IOMs

• Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs

• Activating the C300

C300 Configuration 671 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Activating a Control Strategy Honeywell

Select LASTCOLD

C300 Configuration 672 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Activating a Control Strategy, contd. Honeywell

Click Yes

Blue: The object is not running (inactive)

Green: The object is running (active)
Red: Communication failure

C300 Configuration 673 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Other C300 Configuration Honeywell

• A Control Module
is configured like a
C200 Control
Module, a sample
is shown
• For more detail,
please refer to the
sample lab
procedure

Series C I/O
Channels

C300 Configuration 674 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When you configure and load C300 hardware and I/O in Control Builder,
remember:

– Series C IOM number is set on the IOTA of the corresponding IOM using a
numbered jumper plug

– The device index of C300 can be found on the rotary switches located in
front of the C300 board

– Before loading the C300 controller, its Control Execution Environment (CEE)
and IOLINKs:

• Configure the Controller, its CEE, and IOLINKs

• Define the I/O Family type on each IOLINK

• Assign the IOMs to the respective IOLINKs

– Activate the C300 from the CEE

C300 Configuration 675 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

C300 Configuration 676 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration 7/5/2023
 How to Build Dynamic Shapes

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 677 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Create Dynamic Shapes

– Insert Dynamic Shapes

into process displays

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 678 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building and Grouping Guidelines

• Creating Dynamic Shapes
• Using Custom Properties
• Inserting Dynamic Shapes into process displays

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 679 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Building Dynamic Shapes Honeywell
• Building Dynamic Shapes

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 680 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Grouping Dynamic Shapes Honeywell
• Group all objects within a Dynamic Shape to form one object.

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 681 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building and Grouping Guidelines


• Creating Dynamic Shapes


• Using Custom Properties

• Inserting Dynamic Shapes into process displays

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 682 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Creating Dynamic Shapes Honeywell

To create new Dynamic Shapes


• Select File > New > Dynamic Shape


• Or use the display icon

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 683 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Dynamic Shape Properties Honeywell
• Accessing Properties in a Dynamic Shape

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 684 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Custom Properties Honeywell
• Building the Custom Properties list

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 685 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Adding Custom Properties Honeywell
• Custom Properties make a Dynamic Shape generic

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 686 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Point and Parameter Custom Properties Honeywell
• Custom Properties – Point and Parameter

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 687 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Custom Properties – Default Values Honeywell
• Custom Properties make a Dynamic Shape flexible

These generic names will

be linked to real database
points and parameters
when you insert this Shape
into your process display

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 688 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Building a Dynamic Shape Display Honeywell
• Add objects to your Dynamic Shape display

The Custom Names will be

used for the data related
properties of dynamic objects

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 689 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Using the Data Tab Honeywell
• Using the Data Tab

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 690 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Assigning Custom Properties Honeywell
• Assigning Custom Properties

Custom Properties
will be linked to a
database point,
parameter or value
when inserted into a
process display

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 691 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Saving Your Dynamic Shapes Honeywell
• Group and Save your Dynamic Shapes

Reminder: Group all objects into one group before saving the Dynamic Shape.

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 692 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Shape Storage Reminder Honeywell
• Store Dynamic Shapes (as well as Shape Sequences) in a registered
folder for faster callup.

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 693 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building and Grouping Guidelines

• Creating Dynamic Shapes

• Using Custom Properties


• Inserting Dynamic Shapes into process displays

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 694 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Inserting a Dynamic Shape Honeywell
• Inserting a Dynamic Shape using the Insert Shape Icon

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 695 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Modify Custom Properties Honeywell

• Link the appropriate point/parameter/value

Enter values
here for
Custom
Properties

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 696 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell

• When building and inserting Dynamic Shapes:

– Begin with the correct display type

– Add Custom Properties to the display for flexibility
– Add objects and dynamics, using the Custom Property names and
parameters defined in the display

– Group ALL objects before saving the Dynamic Shape

– Remember to modify the Properties of the Dynamic Shape after insertion
into your process display for proper operation

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 697 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Lab Examples - 1 of 4 Honeywell
• Creating Simple Dynamic Shapes

Green indicates that

the first three fans
are running

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 698 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Lab Examples - 2 of 4 Honeywell
• Create Complex Dynamic Shapes

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 699 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Lab Examples - 3 of 4 Honeywell
• Create Dynamic Shapes for Analog Indicators

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 700 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Lab Examples - 4 of 4 Honeywell
• Create a Dynamic Shape for Loop Operation

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 701 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe How to Build Dynamic Shapes

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Dynamic Shape lab exercises

Dynamic Shapes in HMIWeb Display Builder 702 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
How to Build Dynamic Shapes 7/5/2023
 Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for
Labs

EXCEL Simulation 703 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn how the
Excel Data Exchange program, a
licensed Honeywell option, works
with the Excel simulation
spreadsheet and process simulator
used in this course

• At the conclusion of this lesson,

you will be able to:
– Identify the two function block
parameters available only in the
simulated control execution (SCE)
environment

– Identify the three simulation modes

available in the SCE environment

– Explain the purpose of closing and

reopening the spreadsheet after
configuring and loading new tags
to the system

EXCEL Simulation 704 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs 7/5/2023
SIMVALUE and SIMMODE Honeywell
• SIMVALUE AND
SIMMODE are only
available for the SCE
environment

• SIMMODE provides three

modes: NONE,
DIRECTSUB, or
SIMVALSUB

• SIMVALUE substitutes
the PV when the simmode
is in SIMVALSUB

EXCEL Simulation 705 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs 7/5/2023
Simulation Spreadsheet Honeywell

EULO =G7 Current

Tag Mode
select mode
EUHI Not<EULO
Function block Result of
Not>EUHI
parameter two left
OP columns
The new PV
OP/100SPAN+EULO Mode change
permit

Excel must be open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded

EXCEL Simulation 706 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs 7/5/2023
Simulation Spreadsheet Honeywell
• Some of these tags will be built as a part of the lab and some imported
• There are tags configured in the spreadsheet which do not exist in
Experion server, at this stage of class

EXCEL Simulation 707 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the Excel Simulation Used for Labs

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

EXCEL Simulation 708 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs 7/5/2023
 Cascade Style Sheets

Cascade Style Sheets 709 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Create a Cascade Style Sheet

– Apply a Cascade Style

Sheet to your process
display

Cascade Style Sheets 710 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Creating a Cascade Style Sheet


• Cascade Style Sheet Properties


• Linking a Cascade Style Sheet to a process display


• Applying CSS styles to display objects


• Breakpoint Animation

Cascade Style Sheets 711 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Cascade Style Sheets (CSS) Honeywell
• Standard web functionality implemented in HMIWeb Display Builder
• Cascade Style Sheets provide a way to control the appearance of
multiple displays from a single external file -- create visually consistent
displays

Cascade Style Sheets 712 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Creating Cascade Style Sheets Honeywell
• Created with a conventional text editor (Notepad)
• Start with the “sample.css” in the HMIWeb Display Builder folder

C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\HMIWeb Display Builder\Example

Cascade Style Sheets 713 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
CSS Styles and Syntax Rules Honeywell
• Example CSS
– Three styles defined
• General_Style
• Process Lines
• Pumps
• Syntax rules
– Style class names must start
with a dot
– Style class names cannot
contain spaces
– Note the braces { } that separate Custom
the properties of each class Properties
– And the use of comments /*

Cascade Style Sheets 714 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Creating a Cascade Style Sheet


• Cascade Style Sheet Properties

• Linking a Cascade Style Sheet to a process display

• Applying CSS styles to display objects

• Breakpoint Animation

Cascade Style Sheets 715 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
CSS Fill Properties Honeywell
• Fill Properties

Name Type Description Examples

hw-fill-color Color Object fill color hw-fill-color: blue;

hw-fill-color: #fec012;
hw-fill-effect Text Enumeration Object fill effect hw-fill-effect: none;
{“none”, “blink”} hw-fill-effect: blink;

hw-fill-style Text Enumeration Object fill style hw-fill-style: solid;

{“solid”, “transparent”, hw-fill-style: transparent;
“gradient”}

hw-fill-gradient- Color Object fill gradient color hw-fill-gradient-color: blue;

color hw-fill-gradient-color: #fec012;

hw-fill-gradient- Integer (0 to 100) Object fill gradient focus – a hw-fill-gradient-focus: 50;

focus relative position from 0% to
100%
hw-fill-gradient- Text Enumeration Object fill gradient style hw-fill-gradient-style: vertical;
style {“vertical”, “horizontal”}

hw-fill-level-color Color Object level fill color hw-fill-level-color: blue;

hw-fill-level-color: #fec012;

Cascade Style Sheets 716 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
CSS Line Properties Honeywell
• Line Properties
Name Type Description Examples

hw-line-color Color Object line color hw-line-color: blue;

hw-line-color: #fec012;
hw-line-width Integer Object line width in pixels hw-line-width: 1;
hw-line-width: 2;
hw-line-effect Text Enumeration Object line effect hw-line-effect: blink;
{“none”, “blink”}

hw-line-style Text Enumeration Object line style hw-line-style: solid;

{“transparent”, “solid”,
“inset”, “outset”, “ridge”,
“groove”, “dotted”,
“dashed”, “double”,
“shortdash”, “dash”,
“longdash”, “dot”,
“dashdot, “dashdotdot”}

hw-line-start-arrow Text Enumeration Object line start arrow type hw-line-start-arrow: open;
{“none”, “open”,
“closed”, “oval”}
hw-line-end-arrow Text Enumeration Object line end arrow type hw-line-end-arrow: open;
{“none”, “open”,
“closed”, “oval”}

Cascade Style Sheets 717 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
CSS Text Properties Honeywell
• Text Properties

Name Type Description Examples

hw-text-color Color Object text color hw-text-color: blue;

hw-text-color: #fec012;
hw-text-effect Text Enumeration Object text effect hw-text-effect: italic blink;
{“none”, “strikeout”,
“underline”, “italic”,
“bold”, “blink”}
hw-text-family Text family name Text family name hw-text-family: Times;
hw-text-family: Arial;
hw-text-size Text size Text size hw-text-size: 12pt

hw-text-align Text Enumeration {“left”, Text alignment hw-text-align: justify;

“center”, “right”, “justify”}

Cascade Style Sheets 718 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
CSS Other Properties - 1 Honeywell
• Various “Other” Properties
Name Type Description Examples

hw-element-class Text Enumeration A list of objects to which hw-element-class: hvg.base.1

{“#page”, “hvg.base.1”, this style class applies. hsc.alpha.1;
“hvg.group.1”,
“hvg.textbox.1”,
“hvg.combined.1”,
“hsc.alpha.1”,
“hsc.checkbox.1”,
“hsc.button.1”,
“hsc.indicator.1”,
“hsc.combo.1”,
“hsc.image.1”,
“hsc.shape.1” }
hw-rotation Integer (0 to 359) Rotation of object (in hw-rotation: 20;
degrees) relative to it’s
parent

hw-animation- Color Object alarm low color hw-animation-alarm-low-color:

alarm-low-color blue;

Cascade Style Sheets 719 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Hw Element Class Example Honeywell
• hw-element-class:

Cascade Style Sheets 720 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
CSS Other Properties - 2 Honeywell
• Various “Other” Properties
Name Type Description Examples

hw-animation- Color Object alarm high color hw-animation-alarm-high-color: blue;

alarm-high-color

hw-animation- Color Object alarm urgent color hw-animation-alarm-urgent-color:

alarm-urgent-color blue;

hw-animation- Color Object offscan color hw-animation-offscan-color: blue;

offscan-color

hw-animation- Color Object breakpoint animation hw-animation-breakpoint1-color: blue;

breakpointX-color colors (from 0 to 8)

hw-image-src URL or Path Image object location. Paths hw-image-src: url(myimage.jpg);

are either absolute or relative
to stylesheet location.

hw-cursor See CSS cursor attribute for details

Cascade Style Sheets 721 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
CSS Other Properties - 3 Honeywell
• Various “Other” Properties

Name Type Description Examples

hw-visibility Text Enumeration Specifies whether object is hw-visibility: visible;

{“inherit”, “visible”, displayed
“hidden”}

hw-shape-src URL or Path Shape object location. Paths hw-shape-src: url(myshape.sha);

are either absolute or relative
to stylesheet location.

For additional details see Knowledge Builder - HMIWeb Display Building Guide -
“Using Advanced Display Features”

Cascade Style Sheets 722 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Color Constants Honeywell
• HTML Color Names

aliceblue. cyan. dimgray. lavenderblush. maroon. orangered. seashell.

antiquewhite. darkblue dodgerblue. lawngreen. mediumaquamarine. orchid. sienna.
aqua. darkcyan. firebrick. lemonchiffon. mediumblue palegoldenrod. silver.
aquamarine. darkgoldenrod. floralwhite. lightblue. mediumorchid. palegreen. skyblue.
azure. darkgray. forestgreen. lightcoral. mediumpurple. paleturquoise. slateblue.
beige. darkgreen fuchsia. lightcyan. mediumseagreen. palevioletred. slategray.
bisque. darkkhaki. gainsboro. lightgoldenrodyellow. mediumslateblue. papayawhip. snow.
black darkmagenta. ghostwhite. lightgray. mediumspringgreen. peachpuff. springgreen.
blanchedalmond. darkolivegreen. gold. lightgreen. mediumturquoise. peru. steelblue.
blue darkorange. goldenrod. lightpink. mediumvioletred. pink. tan.
blueviolet. darkorchid. gray. lightsalmon. midnightblue. plum. teal.
brown. darkred. green. lightseagreen. mintcream. powderblue. thistle.
burlywood. darksalmon. greenyellow. lightskyblue. mistyrose. purple. tomato.
cadetblue. darkseagreen. honeydew. lightslategray. moccasin. red. turquoise.
chartreuse. darkslateblue. hotpink. lightsteelblue. navajowhite. rosybrown. violet.
chocolate. darkslategray. indianred. lightyellow. navy royalblue. wheat.
coral. darkturquoise. indigo. lime. oldlace. saddlebrown. white.
cornflowerblue. darkviolet. ivory. limegreen. olive. salmon. whitesmoke.
cornsilk. deeppink. khaki. linen. olivedrab. sandybrown. yellow.
crimson. deepskyblue. lavender. magenta. orange. seagreen. yellowgreen.

For details about named colors, see

http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/workshop/author/dhtml/reference/colors/colors.asp

Cascade Style Sheets 723 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Example Cascade Style Sheet Honeywell

Cascade Style Sheets 724 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Creating a Cascade Style Sheet

• Cascade Style Sheet Properties


• Linking a Cascade Style Sheet to a process display

• Applying CSS styles to display objects

• Breakpoint Animation

Cascade Style Sheets 725 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Linking a CSS Honeywell
• Linking a Cascade Style Sheet

Cascade Style Sheets 726 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Select a CSS Honeywell
• Browse and select the style sheet

Cascade Style Sheets 727 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Creating a Cascade Style Sheet

• Cascade Style Sheet Properties

• Linking a Cascade Style Sheet to a process display


• Applying CSS styles to display objects

• Breakpoint Animation

Cascade Style Sheets 728 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Select a Style Honeywell
• Select a Style from the linked Cascade Style Sheet

Cascade Style Sheets 729 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Applying a CSS Honeywell
• Applying a Style Class
– Object properties controlled by a CSS cannot be manually modified
– Removing or unlinking the Style will not reset the properties of the object to
their original values
– Use “UNDO”

Cascade Style Sheets 730 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Creating a Cascade Style Sheet

• Cascade Style Sheet Properties

• Linking a Cascade Style Sheet to a process display

• Applying CSS styles to display objects


• Breakpoint Animation

Cascade Style Sheets 731 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
CSS Breakpoint Animation Honeywell
• Cascade Style Sheets can specify a style class for each breakpoint
when animating a display element

hw-animation-breakpoint0-class: Brkpnt0;
hw-animation-breakpoint1-class: Brkpnt1;
...
hw-animation-breakpoint6-class: Brkpnt6;

• The value of each “class” attribute is a text string defining the name of a
style sheet breakpoint class

.Brkpnt0
{
hw.element-class: hvg.base.1 hsc.alpha.1;
hw-line-color: Gold;
hw-line-width: 8;
}

Cascade Style Sheets 732 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Breakpoint Animation Honeywell

• Using breakpoint animation, a style

class for each breakpoint can be
defined

• This means breakpoints can drive

any display attribute that can be
controlled by a cascading style
Style attributes sheet.
specified in Brkpnt#
– line style
– color
– fill style
– Size
– rotation

Cascade Style Sheets 733 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Example of Breakpoint Animation Honeywell
• VectorAndAlpha_Style applied to process lines

Breakpoint
Animation

Cascade Style Sheets 734 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Breakpoint Animation Honeywell
• Object Property Configuration

Cascade Style Sheets 735 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Style Class Attributes Honeywell
• Line color and width changes based on breakpoint definitions

SP value =
22

SP value =
43

Cascade Style Sheets 736 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When building and applying Cascade Style Sheets:

– Start with an existing style sheet and modify with a text editor (Notepad)
– Follow the basic syntax rules for structure and properties
– Link the style sheet to the display
– Select a style for objects in the display
– Use “undo” to recall original object properties
– Properties of style-controlled objects cannot be manually changed
– Use breakpoint animation to control display element attributes
– One style sheet can be used for multiple displays; update the style sheet
 and displays will automatically update on next recall

Cascade Style Sheets 737 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Lab Example - Before CSS Honeywell
• Lab Example – Before linking and applying a CSS

Cascade Style Sheets 738 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Lab Example - After CSS Honeywell
• Lab Example – After linking and applying a CSS

Logo
Added

Breakpoint
Animation

Background
Color Change

Cascade Style Sheets 739 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe How to Create and Apply Cascade Style

Sheets

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Cascade Style Sheet lab exercise

Cascade Style Sheets 740 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Cascade Style Sheets 7/5/2023
 Describe the Procedure to Build Control
Modules

Data Acquisition Control Module 741 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn about
Experion control modules

• At the conclusion of this lesson,

you will be able to:

– Build and edit control modules

– Load, activate and monitor

control modules

– Insert an OLE object in a control

module

Data Acquisition Control Module 742 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building and Editing Control Modules

• Loading, Activating, and Monitoring Control Modules
• Inserting an OLE Object in a Control Module

Data Acquisition Control Module 743 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Creating a Control Module (CM) Honeywell

Sequentially numbered name

given by Control Builder

Blank CM

Data Acquisition Control Module 744 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Building a CM – Assigning CMs to the CEE Honeywell

3 4
6
1

Data Acquisition Control Module 745 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Creating a CM – Drag and Drop Honeywell

Drag and
Drop

Data Acquisition Control Module 746 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Configuring a CM Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module 747 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Configuring a CM – Main Tab Honeywell

• Name and item

name

• Parent asset

• Execution period

• Execution order in
CEE and Execution
Phase

Data Acquisition Control Module 748 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Configuring a CM – Execution Cycle Honeywell
• Execution period and phase = execution cycle

This execution cycle

has 40 timing phases of
50 ms each

PHASE
0 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 37 38 39

1850 1950
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 1900 2000
TIME (ms)
• Examples:

– A CM with a one second execution period (1000 ms) and a phase of

0 would execute at phase 0 and again at phase 20

– A CM with an execution period of 200 milliseconds and a phase of 1

will execute in cycles 1, 5, 9, ... 37

Data Acquisition Control Module 749 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
CPU Loading Honeywell

CEE
detail
display

Data Acquisition Control Module 750 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Question 1: CM Period and Phase Honeywell
Together, the CM execution period
and phase define the:

A) Execution cycle
B) Execution phase hour
C) Execution phase minute
D) Execution order

The correct
Your answer:answer is:
Yes!
No.
YouThe
The execution
execution
must answer theperiod
period and
and phase
questionphase of
of aa CM
before CM
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
definecontinuing
the execution cycle.

Click
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue.
continue Submit Clear

Data Acquisition Control Module 751 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Building a CM – Inserting Function Blocks Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module 752 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Function Block Execution Order in the CM Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module 753 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Connecting Function Blocks with the Wiring Tool Honeywell

Not yet
connected

Data Acquisition Control Module 754 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Building CMs Honeywell
Analog loop CM

3 5

4 3
2
3

Data Acquisition Control Module 755 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Building CMs, contd. Honeywell
Device control CM

Expanded
to show
function
blocks
Inputs

Outputs

Logic/interlocks

Data Acquisition Control Module 756 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Permissive/Interlocks Honeywell
Device control detail display

2-state

Data Acquisition Control Module 757 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Question 2: Execution Order in a CM Honeywell
Which of these is a definition of
the Execution Order in CM?
A) All function blocks with the same
execution order in multiple CMs
are executed in parallel
B) The execution cycle of the CM
in the CEE
C) The execution phase of the
function block in the CEE
D) The sequential execution order
of function blocks in a CM

The correct
Your answer: answer is:
No. "Execution
Yes!
No. "Execution Order
Order in
in aa CM"
CM" isis the
the sequential
sequential
You must answer the question before
execution order of function blocks in aa CM.
execution
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not - order
answer
answered
-Click
Click of function
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question blocks
correctly!
to
tocontinue in
continue
completelyCM.
continuing
Click anywhere
Click anywhere to
to continue.
continue.
Submit Clear

Data Acquisition Control Module 758 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building and Editing Control Modules


• Loading, Activating, and Monitoring Control Modules

• Inserting an OLE Object in a Control Module

Data Acquisition Control Module 759 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Loading CMs Honeywell

1
3

Right-click

Data Acquisition Control Module 760 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Loading CMs, contd. Honeywell

Check the
appropriate boxes

Data Acquisition Control Module 761 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Activating/Inactivating CMs Honeywell

Right-click

Data Acquisition Control Module 762 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Monitoring CMs – Scale Factor Honeywell
Monitoring/Chart Visualization

Scale Factor
Icon

Data Acquisition Control Module 763 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building and Editing Control Modules

• Loading, Activating, and Monitoring Control Modules


• Inserting an OLE Object in a Control Module

Data Acquisition Control Module 764 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Inserting a Video Clip in a CM Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module 765 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Question 3: Loading Control Modules Honeywell
Which of the following is not a way to load a control module?
A) Select the corresponding CM in the
Project tab and then select
Controller > Load
B) Select the CM or IOM in the Project
tab and select the down arrow
C) Select the CM or IOM in the
Monitoring tab and select the
down arrow
D) Left-click the CM in the
Project tab and select Load

The correct
Your answer:answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! "Left-click
"Left-clickthetheCPMCPMininthe
theProject
Projecttab
taband
and
Incorrect.
You "Left-click
must answer the
the CPM in the
question Project tab and
before
select
You didLoad"
Incorrect
Correct
You -is the anywhere
not -answer
answered
Click
Click wrong
anywhere
thisthisanswer.
question You must RIGHT-
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
select Load" is the wrong
continuing answer. You must RIGHT-
click the CPM in the Project tab to select the Load
click the CPM in the Project tab to select the Load
option.
option.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue. Submit Clear

Data Acquisition Control Module 766 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Playing the Video Honeywell

• Right-click video clip

• Select Play

• Works the same in Station

Data Acquisition Control Module 767 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When building, loading, activating, and monitoring a CM in Control
Builder, remember:

– A new CM is automatically assigned a unique, sequential name

– The execution phase and period of the CM defines the execution cycle
– Cycle overruns can occur when the scheduled processing for a cycle does
not finish by the start of the next cycle

– Function blocks execute in ascending order beginning with the block having
the lowest execution order value

– You
menu
can load a CM from the Project tree using the Control Builder Controller

– You can view an activated CM in the Monitoring tree of Control Builder or in

the associated detail display in Station

Data Acquisition Control Module 768 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Data Acquisition Control Module 769 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Data Acquisition Control Module 770 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules 7/5/2023
 Describe Bulk Build Functionality

Data Acquisition Control Module 771 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn to use the Bulk Build tool in
Control Builder
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to describe how to
quickly build multiple control modules of the same type using the
Bulk Build tool

Data Acquisition Control Module 772 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Bulk Build Procedure Overview

• Bulk Build Procedure

Data Acquisition Control Module 773 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Features of the Bulk Build Tool Honeywell
• Bulk Build:
– Productivity tool used to generate large quantities of control strategies
outside of Control Builder

– Principle is very similar to bulk edit function parameters in Excel

– Licensed tool option

• Bulk Build supports the following components:

– Control modules

– Sequential control modules

– Fieldbus devices

– I/O modules

– User templates (instances of templates and templates themselves)

Data Acquisition Control Module 774 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Bulk Build Procedure Overview Honeywell
• Create a typical (standard) control strategy

• Create copies of the typical using the bulk

build tool

• Export the copies of the typical to an Excel

spreadsheet or other qualified media

• Manipulate the Excel spreadsheet

(multiplies the typical control strategy and
changes the required parameters)

• Read the Excel spreadsheet back into

Control Builder, which creates the
individual control strategies (uses normal
configuration checks)

Data Acquisition Control Module 775 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Bulk Build Procedure Overview

• Bulk Build Procedure

Data Acquisition Control Module 776 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Create the Bulk Build List Honeywell

Tools > Bulk Build > Create Bulk Build List

Invoke Create
Bulk Build List

Data Acquisition Control Module 777 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Select a Typical Control Strategy Honeywell

Select a typical
control strategy

Set copy name

and count

Data Acquisition Control Module 778 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Configure Prefix and Suffix Honeywell

Selected Typical Number of copies to create

Data Acquisition Control Module 779 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Configure Tag Names Honeywell

Use Alpha Sequence –

Add letter to each
block name
Ex: PIC0102A, B

Add Underscore
Separator –
Ex: PIC0102_X

Add Leading Zeros –

Ex: 00PIC0102

Data Acquisition Control Module 780 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Configure Prefix and Suffix Honeywell

Add prefix or suffix,

then start number and
increment amount

Add prefix or suffix

Data Acquisition Control Module 781 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Select Parameters Honeywell

Result is updated

Select block
parameter for
Bulk Build list

Data Acquisition Control Module 782 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Select Parameters, contd. Honeywell

Select block
Parameter selected
for typical control
strategy

Parameters of
selected block

Data Acquisition Control Module 783 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Select Parameters, contd. Honeywell

Result is updated

Data Acquisition Control Module 784 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Select Path Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module 785 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Modify Parameters in Excel Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module 786 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Modify Parameters in Excel, contd. Honeywell

Make modifications
as desired in the
required CM

Data Acquisition Control Module 787 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Read Excel File Honeywell
Tools > Bulk Build > Read Bulk Build List

Invoke Read
Bulk Build List

Data Acquisition Control Module 788 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Validate and Build Control Strategies Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module 789 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Validate and Build Control Strategies, contd. Honeywell

Select to replace
existing, when desired
Select Validate

Data Acquisition Control Module 790 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Validation Report Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module 791 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Validate and Build Control Strategies, contd. Honeywell

Ordering Build….

Building blocks….

Select Build

Data Acquisition Control Module 792 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Build Report Honeywell

View report
after bulk build

Data Acquisition Control Module 793 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
New CMs Honeywell

New CMs available

in the Project

Data Acquisition Control Module 794 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Question 1: Bulk Build Tool Honeywell
The Bulk Build tool is used to:
A) Create EB files for C200/C300
control modules
B) Generate large quantities of
control strategies outside Control
Builder
C) Export control modules to other
ERDBs

D) All of the above

Yourcorrect
The answer: answer is:
You must answer the question before
Incorrect.
Correct!
You notThe
Incorrect
Correct
did You The Bulk
Bulk
-answer
answered
-Click
Click Build
Buildtool
anywhere
anywhere
this
this toolis
question iscontinue
used
used
correctly!
toto to
togenerate
continue generate
completely
continuing
multiple control strategies outside Control Builder.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

Data Acquisition Control Module 795 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• The Bulk Build tool:

– Exports multiple copies of a typical control strategy to an Excel spreadsheet

where each copy can be modified

– Imports the edited Excel spreadsheet back into Control Builder which applies
the normal configuration checks and creates the individual control strategies

– Supports the following components

• Control modules

• Sequential control modules

• Fieldbus devices

• I/O modules

• User templates (instances of templates and templates themselves)

Data Acquisition Control Module 796 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe Bulk Build Functionality

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Data Acquisition Control Module 797 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Data Acquisition Control Module 798

Describe Bulk Build Functionality 7/5/2023
 Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality

Data Acquisition Control Module 799 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn how to use the bulk edit parameters tool in
Control Builder

• At the conclusion of this lesson,

you will know how to
use the tool to:

– Export tags and parameters from

a Control Builder project to an
Excel spreadsheet

– Modify the parameters in an

Excel spreadsheet

– Read the parameters into a

Control Builder project

Data Acquisition Control Module 800 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
Create Bulk Edit List Honeywell
• Bulk Edit Parameters

– Utility which allows you to change the value of multiple parameters in a

single operation by importing a prepared list of edits

• Tools > Bulk Edit Parameters > Create Bulk Edit List

Data Acquisition Control Module 801 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
Create Bulk Edit List, contd. Honeywell
• The Show All Points button is used to populate the "Available Points"
selection list with the names of all points in the database

Data Acquisition Control Module 802 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
Create Bulk Edit List , contd. Honeywell
• Select the points and parameters

The selected points

The parameter(s)
to be modified

Data Acquisition Control Module 803 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
Create Bulk Edit List , contd. Honeywell
• Build the Excel file

Browse to
desired
output path

Select the
output
file type

Name the
output file
Save

Data Acquisition Control Module 804 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
Edit Parameters Honeywell
• Open the created BulkEdit.xls file in Excel

Edit the parameters

as necessary

Do not change or Use the single quote

add tag names. before numbers ‘100
Keep columns in order.

Data Acquisition Control Module 805 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
Read Bulk Edit List Honeywell

Select Update
Monitor or Project Select Start

Data Acquisition Control Module 806 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
Question 1: Bulk Edit Parameters Tool Honeywell
The bulk edit parameters tool is used to:

A) As an online tool to activate or inactivate multiple

control modules at once
B) To copy the control module to the monitoring tab
C) To export selected control modules
D) To change selected parameters in selected control
modules
Yourcorrect
The answer:
Incorrect.
Correct! answer Editis:
YouThe
TheBulk
mustBulk Edit
answer Parameters
Parameters
the question tool
toolisisused
before usedto
tochange
change
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
selectednot -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
parameters anywhere
this
this
in question
correctly!
totocontinue
selected continue
completely
control modules.
continuing

Click anywhere to continue. Submit Clear

Data Acquisition Control Module 807 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• You can use the Bulk Edit Parameters tool to:

– Export tags and parameters from a Control Builder project to an Excel

spreadsheet

– Modify the parameters in an Excel spreadsheet

• Do not change or add tag names

• Keep columns in order

• Use the single quote before numbers ‘100

– Read the parameters into a Control Builder project

Data Acquisition Control Module 808 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

lab exercise and the six lab exercises that follow it

Data Acquisition Control Module 809 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Data Acquisition Control Module 810 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality 7/5/2023
 Describe the Block Name References in CM
and SCM

Data Acquisition Control Module 811 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn about:

– Block name references in CM and SCM

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:

– Reference a parameter in CM

– Reference a parameter in SCM

Data Acquisition Control Module 812 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
Application Honeywell
• Applies to parameter connector and parameter references

• Applies to expression used in SCM and all Calc Blocks

• Provides a simpler input mechanism for expression references

– The user does not have to enter more information than required
– Shorten the string for references within a container, or within a basic block,
so a tag name does not take up more of the viewing area provided than
necessary
– Shorten the number of characters used in an expression

Data Acquisition Control Module 813 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
Relative Reference Display Option Honeywell

Select the Short Name Option

Data Acquisition Control Module 814 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
Display Option for Expression in Parameter Reference Honeywell
• Reference to a container parameter will be displayed as “$.parameter” in
the expression present in the step of an SCM

• Reference to a parameter which is present on the same block will be

displayed as “parameter name” in the expression of the Auxiliary block

• Reference to a parameter on other basic block will be displayed as

“Blockname.parameter”

– Short Name is applicable to reference within the same CM

Data Acquisition Control Module 815 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
Expression Example – SCM Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module 816 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
Expression Example – CM Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module 817 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
Expression Example – CM Honeywell

Data Acquisition Control Module 818 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
Question 1: Short Names Honeywell
Which of the following statements is true about Short Names?
A) Optional setting
B) Applies to parameter connector and parameter
references
C) Applies to expression used in SCM and all Calc
Blocks

D) Reference to a container parameter will be displayed

as "$.parameter" in the expression present in the
step of a SCM

E) All of the above

No. The
No.
Yes!
No.
The
Your The
The correct
correct
correct
correct
answer: answer
answer
answer
answer is: is is "All
is "All of
"All of the
of the above".
the above". All
above". All
All
ofYou
of
of these
these
these statements
statements
statements
must answer the arequestion
are
are correct about
correct
correct about
about Short
Short
beforeShort
You Correct
not -answer
Incorrect
did You -Click
Clickanywhere
answered anywhere
this
Names.
Names.
Names. to
questionto
this correctly!continue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere
Click
Click anywhere to
anywhere to continue.
to continue.
continue. Submit Clear

Data Acquisition Control Module 819 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• The block name references in CM and SCM function allows you to:

– Do parameter reference in CM
– Do parameter reference in SCM

Data Acquisition Control Module 820 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Data Acquisition Control Module 821 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Data Acquisition Control Module 822 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM 7/5/2023
 How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus

Shortcut Menus 823 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Create Shortcut Menus

– Use Shortcut Menus

in your displays

Shortcut Menus 824 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Standard Shortcut Menus

• Creating customized Shortcut Menus
• Associating Shortcut Menus with display objects

Shortcut Menus 825 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Standard Shortcut Menus Honeywell
• Shortcut Menus, also known as context menus, appear when a user
right-clicks an object or the display.
Default/Standard Shortcut Menu

Display level Shortcut Menu

Release #

C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\System\Rxxx

Shortcut Menus 826 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Default Shortcut Menu Name Honeywell
• Default shortcut menu name
– for a C200 PID block the name would be “sysDtlPIDA_SM.XML”

When no point detail display is defined, the default shortcut menu will be used.

Shortcut Menus 827 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Standard Shortcut Menus

• Creating customized Shortcut Menus

• Associating Shortcut Menus with display objects

Shortcut Menus 828 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Customized Shortcut Menus Honeywell
• Customized Shortcut Menu

Shortcut Menus 829 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Creating Shortcut Menus Honeywell
• Open an existing Shortcut Menu

C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\System\Rxxx

Shortcut Menus 830 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Example Shortcut Menu Honeywell

Structure

Shortcut Menus 831 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Structure and Syntax Honeywell
• Structure and Basic Syntax
Structure
<?xml version ... >
<menu menuitemstyle... >

<menuitem id... >

your menu item definition
</menuitem>

…other menu items in Shortcut Menu…

Single
<separator/>
menu
items
<menuitem id... >
your menu item definition
</menuitem>
</menu>

Shortcut Menus 832 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Structure Honeywell
• The top lines define the structure

<menu menuItemStyle="{font-family:sans-serif;font-size:9pt;padding-
left:2;background-Color:menu;color:black; cursor:hand}"
highlightItemStyle="{font-family:sans-serif;font-size:9pt;padding-
left:2;background-Color:highlight;color:white; cursor:hand}" width="150"
height="90">

Shortcut Menus 833 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Menu Item Syntax Honeywell
• Single Menu Item
The onclick script runs
<menuitem id="mnu_det" acceleratorKey=""> when the user clicks
<script type="onclick"> the menu item

Window.external.application.InvokeMenu2('commandID');
</script> The onpage script
<script type="onpage"> runs when the page
(i.e., menu) loads
…
</script> The menuitemname
defines the text to
<text>menuitemname</text> appear in the menu
<image>{path}\Toolbar\iconname</image>
</menuitem>
Image or iconname refers
to the icon shown next to
the text or menuitem

Shortcut Menus 834 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Example Menu Item Honeywell
• Using Station’s “Lower” Command

<menuitem id="mnu_lwr" acceleratorKey="">

<script type="onclick">
window.external.application.InvokeMenu('Lower');
</script>
<text>Lower</text>
<image>.\Toolbar\tb013.bmp</image>
</menuitem>

Window.external.application is used to access the Station application object

Shortcut Menus 835 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Station Menu Commands Honeywell
• Using the InvokeMenu (command)

Shortcut Menus 836 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Station Menu Commands Honeywell
• Toolbars Tab

Shortcut Menus 837 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Available Commands Honeywell
• Menu Tab

The command does

not have to be in the
current layout of your
Station’s toolbar

Shortcut Menus 838 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Referencing Objects Honeywell
• Referencing the display and objects

<menuitem id="mnu_shift" acceleratorKey="">

<script type="onclick">
window.external.parentWindow.rect001.style.pixelLeft =
window.external.parentWindow.rect001.style.pixelLeft + 10;
return true
</script>
<text>Shift rectangle</text>
<image>.\Images\image1.bmp</image>
</menuitem>

Window.external.parentWindow is used to access the display

Shortcut Menus 839 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Properties and Methods Honeywell
• CustomShortcutMenuSourceElement
– Represents the object right-clicked
Right-click
• IsAccessPermitted
– Returns True if the user has access to
the point linked to the object which was
right-clicked

• IsInAlarm
– Returns True if the point linked to the
object which was right-clicked is in
alarm and the alarm has not been
acknowledged

Shortcut Menus 840 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Example Script Honeywell
• Enable/Disable Menu Items

<menuitem id="mnu_raise" acceleratorKey="">

<script type="onclick">
window.external.application.InvokeMenu('Raise');
</script>
<script type="onpage">
If( !window.external.IsAccessPermitted
(window.external.customShortcutMenuSourceElement ))
{ this.disabled=true; }
return true;
</script>
<text>Raise</text>
<image>.\Toolbar\tb012.bmp</image>
</menuitem>

Shortcut Menus 841 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Closing a Shortcut Menu Honeywell
• Closes automatically based on registry timeout setting-
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Honeywell\HMIWEB\Shortcutmenus]
"Timeout"="10000"

Shortcut Menus 842 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Shortcut Menu Example Honeywell
• Example Shortcut Menu in Notepad

Shortcut Menus 843 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Additional Details Honeywell

For details, see “Using Advanced Display Features” in the display help files
or in Knowledge Builder

Shortcut Menus 844 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Standard Shortcut Menus

• Creating customized Shortcut Menus


• Associating Shortcut Menus with display objects

Shortcut Menus 845 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Using Shortcut Menus Honeywell
• Associating Shortcut Menus to objects

Shortcut Menus 846 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When creating and using shortcut menus,

– Default shortcut menus are provided based on point types

– Start with an existing shortcut menu, and modify with a text editor (Notepad)
– Follow the basic syntax rules for structure and menuitems
– Associate the shortcut menus to objects
– Right-click an object to use

Shortcut Menus 847 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Lab Example Honeywell
• Customized Shortcut Menu

Right-click

Shortcut Menus 848 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Shortcut Menu lab exercise

Shortcut Menus 849 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Shortcut Menus 850 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Shortcut Menus 7/5/2023
 Describe Templates and the Substitute Name
List

Device Control Module 851 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn to use
templates and the substitute name list
to streamline the production of control
modules

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you

will know how to:

– Build control modules using templates

– Load and verify templates

– Build control modules using the

substitute name list

Device Control Module 852 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Building Control Modules Using Templates

• Loading and Verifying a Template
• Building Control Modules Using a Substitute Name List

Device Control Module 853 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• Templates are control modules created in Control Builder

• Once created, templates may be used to build multiple copies of desired

control strategies

• Templates allow for change to propagate from parent to child

• Templates can contain other templates, up to five levels

Template

Temp_Num GEA
IN[2]

Device Control Module 854 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
R300 Enhancements Honeywell

• User template User template

functionality for
AUXCALC/REGCALC
(introduced in R300)
• Expressions are
supported in user
templates.
• Example:SQRT(CM_AUX
CALC.AUXCALCA.P[1])
• Export/Import supported
on AUXCALC /REGCALC

Device Control Module 855 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Make a Template Honeywell

• In the Library tab, under System, right-click

Control Module

• Select Make Template

Device Control Module 856 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Build the Control Strategy Honeywell
• Build the control strategy and configure parameters

Device Control Module 857 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Identify Projected Parameters Honeywell
• Define custom parameters for your control module

• Connect your custom parameters to exposed pins

Template
Temp_Num
GEA
IN[2]

Device Control Module 858 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Add Template Block Pins Honeywell

• Add pins, as needed, to the template

• You can pin-out the projected parameters

• Parameter connections are OK within a template

Device Control Module 859 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Use Template Honeywell
• Instantiate makes a useable version of the template for project

• Make Template makes a new template in the library (child of the

original)

The name this template will

have in project

Device Control Module 860 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Insert a Template Honeywell

Insert the template into a CM

Device Control Module 861 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Complete CM with Template Honeywell
• Complete the CM with a template

Template

Device Control Module 862 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Question 1: Template Use Honeywell
Templates are best used:

A) For control modules containing one function block

B) For complex graphics
C) Where a complex control strategy is used in multiple
control modules
D) As a tool to prioritize the alarm sequence
Template

Temp_Num GEA
IN[2]
The correct
Your answer: answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! Templates
You mustTemplates
answerarearebest
the bestused
usedbefore
question where
whereaacomplex
complexcontrol
control
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
strategy is used in multiple control modules.
continuing

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

Device Control Module 863 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Building Control Modules Using Templates

• Loading and Verifying a Template

• Building Control Modules Using a Substitute Name List

Device Control Module 864 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Templates in the Monitoring Tab Honeywell
• Containment view/Assignment view

Templates
shown at root
Templates
shown as
contained

Device Control Module 865 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Chart View of a CM with a Template Honeywell

• Green indicates that the template is active

• Blue indicates that the template is inactive

Device Control Module 866 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Template in Chart View Honeywell

Double-click the template in the

tree to open it in chart view

Device Control Module 867 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Question 2: Loading and Verifying Templates Honeywell
Which statement about templates is false?
A) A blue border on the bottom and right hand side of
an instance of a template in the Control Builder chart
view tells you the instance is active
B) In Control Builder containment view, a template
appears as a function block in the control module
C) In the Control Builder assignment view, a template
appears as a control module in the CEE simulation
D) None of the above

Correct!
Incorrect.
A blue
A blue
border
border
on the
on the
bottom
bottom
and and
the the
rightright
hand
side
handof side
Yourcorrect
The an
answer: instance
of an instance
answer is: of a template
of a template
in the Control
in the Control
Builder
chart
Builderview
chart
tells
view
youtells
thatyouthe that
instance
the instance
is inactive
is inactive
and not
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
and question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
active.
not continue
completely
active.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

Device Control Module 868 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Building Control Modules Using Templates

• Loading and Verifying a Template

• Building Control Modules Using a Substitute Name List

Device Control Module 869 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Build Templates using Substitute Name List Honeywell

• Create the substitute names

• Connect them to function block types

Device Control Module 870 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Build Templates using Substitute Name List, contd. Honeywell

• Use the parameter connection tool

• Select the substitute name as a connection

Device Control Module 871 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Build Templates using Substitute Name List, contd. Honeywell
• The substituted names can be resolved to a function block parameter
when the template is instantiated

Resolved

Device Control Module 872 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Question 3: Substitute Name List Honeywell
You may create templates to be:

A) Instantiated as stand-alone
control modules using your
substitute name list

B) Embedded control modules

using projected parameters and
block pins

C) All of the above

Yes!
No. The
The correct
correct answer
answer is is "All
"All of
of the
the above".
above". You
You may
may
create
The templates
correct answer to is:be instantiated as stand -alone
control
You must answerembedded
modules or the questioncontrol modules using
before
Your
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
answer:
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
projectedthis
question
correctly!
totocontinue
continue
parameters.completely
continuing

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

Device Control Module 873 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When using templates, remember:

– Templates are built in Control Builder

– Once created, templates may be used to build multiple copies of desired
 control strategies
– Templates allow for change to propagate from parent to child
– You may create templates to be instantiated as stand-alone control modules
using your substitute name list or embedded control modules using
projected parameters and block pins

Device Control Module 874 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Configure a Device Control Module – with Logic and

Configure a Device Control Module – with Interlock lab exercises

Device Control Module 875 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Device Control Module 876 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List 7/5/2023
 Faceplates and Popups

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 877 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• A popup is a secondary window that appears in addition to your
operating display
Faceplate

• A faceplate is a specialized type of popup

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will

know how to:
Popup
– Distinguish between faceplates
and popups

– Identify standard faceplates

– Create a popup

– Attach a popup or faceplate

to an object
Popup Faceplate

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 878 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Faceplates, popups and their differences


• Standard faceplates


• Creating a popup


• Attaching a popup or faceplate to an object

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 879 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Faceplates and Popups Honeywell

Left click
Popup
• Faceplates and popups:
– Are called by left-clicking an object in a display
– Are modeless child displays that appear on top of the process display
– Can be configured to appear in a consistent location

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 880 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Faceplate and Popup Push Pins Honeywell
• Use the push pin to ensure a
faceplate or popup remains
visible when another display is
Push pin to called
hold display
in place
Detail Display

Popup
Faceplate
Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 881 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Popups Honeywell
• Popups:
– Are secondary windows
created by you

– Can be attached to any

object

– Are used to view and

manipulate the process or
provide information

– Manipulation methods will

differ based on the
information provided

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 882 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Faceplates Honeywell
• A faceplate:
– Is a specialized type of
popup that shows critical
information about the point
to which it is linked

– Must be attached to
dynamic objects for point
data access

• A standard set of faceplates

is provided with the system

• Station can display up to

four faceplates
simultaneously

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 883 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Faceplates, popups and their differences


• Standard faceplates

• Creating a popup

• Attaching a popup or faceplate to an object

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 884 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Standard PID Faceplate Honeywell

PV displayed graphically

OP displayed graphically
Alarm Indication

Setpoint
Process Variable
Output

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 885 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Standard Digital Faceplate Honeywell

State Indication

Alarm Indication
Area

OP combobox to
change state

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 886 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Standard Faceplates Honeywell
• Standard faceplates:
– Can be modified (if modified, the
new faceplate is attached as a
popup to the object calling it.)

– Are located in C:\Program Files

\Honeywell\ ExperionPKS
\Client\System\R300

Standard FP
Modified FP

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 887 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Faceplates, popups and their differences

• Standard faceplates


• Creating a popup

• Attaching a popup or faceplate to an object

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 888 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Creating a Popup Honeywell

• To create a popup:
1. Click the arrow to the right of the New Display icon and select Popup or
select File > New > Popup
A blank screen appears with dotted lines that shows the default popup size

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 889 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Creating a Popup Honeywell

2. If required, change the popup’s size on the Appearance tab in the

Properties window
3. Add appropriate objects to the popup—comboboxes, indicators
alphanumerics…

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 890 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Creating a Popup Honeywell
4. On the Data tab of the
Properties Window, configure
the properties as follows:

• Type of database link:

Point/Parameter
• Point: current database
point

• Parameter: the parameter

this object represents; for
example, PV, OP or SP

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 891 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Creating a Popup Honeywell

5. Add other objects to your

popup, as required

6. Save the popup with an

appropriate filename

Note: A modified
faceplate is considered
Filename:
a popup and should be
11_hsfans.htm named appropriately

Filename:
11_FC01_fp.htm

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 892 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Faceplates, popups and their differences

• Standard faceplates

• Creating a popup


• Attaching a popup or faceplate to an object

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 893 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Attaching a Popup Honeywell

• To attach a popup to an object:

1. Select the object and edit its properties
2. On the Behaviors tab in the Properties window select Popup

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 894 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Attaching a Popup Honeywell

Browse to path of
Position popup popup
automatically

Manually position popup

in parent display

3. Click the Popup tab and specify the popup's:

– Filename/path
– Initial position

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 895 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Attaching a Faceplate Honeywell

• To attach a standard faceplate:

1. Select the object and edit its properties
2. On the Behaviors tab select Faceplate

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 896 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When creating and using faceplates and popups, remember:

– Both are secondary windows used to view and manipulate the process or
provide information

– Popups can be attached to any object

– Faceplates must be attached to dynamic objects for point data access
– A standard set of faceplates is provided with the system
– Ifappropriately
you modify a standard faceplate it becomes a popup -- name it
and attach it as a popup to the object

– When attaching a popup to an object, specify the popup’s filename, path,

and initial position in the Popup tab

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 897 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Lab Example Honeywell
• In the lab exercise that follows, you will:
– Create a popup for the condenser fan operation
– Call the popup from a pushbutton on your D_100 display

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 898 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe Faceplates and Popups

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Popup lab exercise

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 899 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Popups in HMIWeb Display Builder 900 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Faceplates and Popups 7/5/2023
 Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in
CEE

HPM Function Blocks 901 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• Enhanced HPM algorithms is introduced in R300 for CEE
– Regulatory Summer
– Signal Selector
• Supported in
– ACE
– C200
– C300
– SIM-ACE
– SIM-C200

HPM Function Blocks 902 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE 7/5/2023
Regulatory Summer Honeywell
• Regulatory control block
• Has four inputs X1 to X4
• Provides scaling factor for each input

HPM Function Blocks 903 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE 7/5/2023
Regulatory Summer, contd. Honeywell

• Algorithm – Sum four scaled inputs. Add overall gain and overall bias

• X1 is an initializable input for this block while other inputs are non-
initializable

HPM Function Blocks 904 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE 7/5/2023
Signal Selector Honeywell
• Six input Auxiliary Block
• Combines HPM’s HiLoAvg and MidOf3

HPM Function Blocks 905 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE 7/5/2023
Signal Selector, contd. Honeywell
• Algorithms possible
– MINIMUM (MIN)
– MAXIMUM (MAX)
– MEDIAN (MED)
– AVERAGE (AVG)
– MULTIPLEXER (MUX)

HPM Function Blocks 906 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE 7/5/2023
Reverse Output Honeywell
• Provides reverse output
– In R210 Series A Analog Output did not have an option to calculate reverse
output like PM I/O. This is now available in R300

Reverse Output
Option

HPM Function Blocks 907 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE 7/5/2023
Question 1: New Native Function Blocks Honeywell
The Regulatory Summer block:

A) Has four inputs X1 to X4

B) Has the option for providing scaling
factor for each input
C) Sums up the four scaled inputs
D) Has first input X1 initializable while
other inputs are non-initializable
E) All of the above

The
Your correct
Yes!
No. answer:
All of answer
All of the is: statements
the above
above statements are
are true
true about
about
You mustRegulatory
answer the question
Summer before
block.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

HPM Function Blocks 908 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• We have learned about the two native function blocks added in R300:

– Regulatory Summer
– Signal Selector

HPM Function Blocks 909 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the HPM functions duplicated in CEE

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

HPM Function Blocks 910 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE 7/5/2023
 How to Create and Use Trends

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 911 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Create a trend in an HMIWeb Display Builder using the Trend object
– Configure the trend’s basic properties

Trend

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 912 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Working with a Trend Object


• Creating a Trend

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 913 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Trend Object Honeywell

Bar Trend

Line Trend

• A Trend presents information in a graphical manner and can be

configured in several different ways
• You can create multi-line and single-bar trends in HMIWeb Display
Builder

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 914 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Trend Properties Honeywell

• The Properties Window allows

you to configure a trend’s basic
properties

• Additional features can be

accessed using scripts

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 915 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
General Tab Honeywell

• Under the General tab a user can configure:

– Name
– Tool tip
– Size and Position of trend
– Visibility
– Tabbing

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 916 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Plots Tab Honeywell
• A line trend can
display up to 32 plots

• Each plot can be

configured separately

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 917 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Period Tab Honeywell

• Default time period: The amount

of time the user wants to see

• Default sample interval:

The History interval
– The minimum interval is 1
second
– The available history is based
on system configuration

• Offset:
Works in conjunction with the
default time period. Time Period and
Interval

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 918 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
View: Trend Honeywell
• Trend title: Will be seen only if the title tool bar has been enabled

Trend Title

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 919 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
View: Trend type Honeywell
• Trend type Simple Trend

Trend with Tabular History Trend with Events

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 920 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
View: Legend type Honeywell
• Type of Legend
Mini Legend

Full Legend

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 921 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
View: Toolbars Honeywell
• View or hide the following toolbars:
– Title Toolbar
– Chart Toolbar
– X-axis Toolbar

Title Toolbar

Chart
Toolbar

X-axis
Toolbar

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 922 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
View: Plot Area Honeywell
• Plot Type:
– Line Chart
– Bar Chart
• The Bar Chart can be
viewed one point
at a time
• Show X- axis: show
or hide the X-axis
• Show Y- axis: show
or hide the Y-axis Grid
Lines
• Show or hide grid
lines
Y-axis

X-axis

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 923 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
View: Y-axis Honeywell
• Y-axis:
– Units shown can be Eng.
Units or Percent
• Show/enable:
– Axis labels
– Marker labels
– Scrollbar
– In-place range editing

Units Label

In-Place Range
Scrollbar
Axis/Marker
Labels

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 924 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
View: X- axis Honeywell

• X-axis:
– Show Axis labels
– Show Marker labels
– Show Scrollbar
– Show Time selector

Axis/Marker
labels Time Selector
Scrollbar

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 925 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
View: Reference and Grid Lines Honeywell
• Reference Line:
– Clicking on the plot area displays
a reference line
– Configure the width of the
reference line in pixels

Reference
Line

Date and Time

Reference values

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 926 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
View: Reference and Grid Lines Honeywell
• Grid Lines:
– The width and style of the
Grid lines, that appear in the
background of the Trend’s
chart area, can be
configured on the View tab

Grid Lines

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 927 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Fonts Tab Honeywell
• Items customized using the
Fonts tab:
– X and Y axis: Font type, Size
and Effects
– Legend: Font type and size

Y-axis

X-axis Legend

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 928 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Colors Tab Honeywell
• Appearance can be changed using the Colors tab
– Plot area: Background
– X and Y axis
– Reference line color
– Legend: Background and Text color

Legend
Plot Area

Reference
Y Axis / X Axis Line

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 929 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Zoom function Honeywell
• Zoom in on a chart area by:
– Using the Zoom button at the
bottom of the trend on the X-
axis toolbar
– Dragging diagonally across
the chart in the area of
interest
• The trend status will show
PAUSED

Area being zoomed

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 930 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Zoom function Honeywell

• The trend returns to its normal scale by:

– Clicking on the Zoom Out icon
– Clicking on the Reset zoom level icon
– Clicking on the Play button on the X-axis toolbar

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 931 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Unzoom Honeywell
• Zoom Out using the Unzoom / Zoom Out icon
– When zoomed out, the trend status will be PAUSED

• To return to the normal scale, use the Reset zoom

level icon

Zoom Out Reset Zoom

Icon Level

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 932 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Working with a Trend Object


• Creating a Trend

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 933 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Creating a Trend Honeywell
• To create a trend:
– Select the trend tool
– Drag the pointer diagonally over the display

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 934 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Modifying Trend Properties Honeywell
• The Plots tab is used to configure • The Period tab is only applicable
up to 32 point.parameters to a trend and controls the time
period, history sample interval,
and offset properties

• The View, Fonts and Colors properties can be modified as previously

shown
Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 935 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Using a Trend Display in Station Honeywell
• Clicking on the plot creates a reference line and generates a scripting event

Reference Line
Plot Tool Tip
with Tool Tip

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 936 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When creating trends:

 – You can create multi-line and single-bar charts in HMIWeb Display Builder

 – A line chart can display up to 32 plots

 – A ToolTip shows the value of the trace at the point where you move the
mouse over a plot; with scripting, use the OnReferenceLineSet event to
obtain other values

 – Use the Zoom feature to get better definition for a particular section of the
plot area

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 937 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Lab Example Honeywell

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 938 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe How to Create and Use Trends

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to your Trend lab exercise

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 939 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Trends in HMIWeb Display Builder 940 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

How to Create and Use Trends 7/5/2023
 Describe ERDB Administration

Other Tools for C200 941 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn about the engineering repository database
(ERDB) and how to administer it

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:

– Identify the purpose and location of the ERDB

– Open the Database Administration (DBAdmin) tool for the ERDB

– Describe the DBAdmin functions for the ERDB

Other Tools for C200 942 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Introduction to the ERDB

• Opening and Navigating the DBAdmin Tool for the ERDB

Other Tools for C200 943 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
ERDB Description Honeywell
• The ERDB:

– Contains logic CMs/SCMs

from the C200 and C300
controllers

– Is created and referenced

via Control Builder and
DBAdmin tasks

– Is a purely SQL server

database

Other Tools for C200 944 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
ERDB Location Honeywell

Program Files>Honeywell>Experion PKS>Engineering Tools

>system>ER

Other Tools for C200 945 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
ERDB Files Honeywell

Main database file

QVCS database

Warning!!!
Even though the database files
have an .mdf extension, they are not
Microsoft Access database files.
Attempting to open these files with any
program may corrupt the entire database.

Other Tools for C200 946 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
Redundant ERDB Servers Honeywell

ERDB_A - Secondary

ERDB_B - Primary

Replication Status:
No-Sync
Sync
Sync-fail
Synching

Other Tools for C200 947 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
Question 1: The ERDB Honeywell
Which statement about the engineering repository database (ERDB) is
false?

A) It can be redundant

B) It contains logic CMs/SCMs

from C200 controllers

C) It is created through Control Builder

D) Its .mdf files can be opened with

any database program

Incorrect.
Correct! TheThefalse
falsestatement
statementisis"Its
"Its.mdf
.mdffiles
filescan
canbe
be
Your
The answer:
correct answer is:
opened with any database program ."Attempting to open
You
themust
.mdf answer
files may thecorrupt
question
thebefore
entire database.
YouIncorrect
did not
You
Correct answer
-Click
Click
-answered this question
anywhere
this
anywhere completely
tocontinue
continue
correctly!
to
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

Other Tools for C200 948 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Introduction to the ERDB

• Opening and Navigating the DBAdmin Tool for the ERDB

Other Tools for C200 949 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
Opening DBAdmin for the ERDB Honeywell
• DBAdmin (ERDB) is opened through Configuration Studio

Other Tools for C200 950 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
DBAdmin Window Panes Honeywell

Tree pane View pane

Other Tools for C200 951 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB Honeywell

The result is six

different choices for
the content of the
view pane

Click the PLUS sign

( + ) to expand
DBAdmin and
Experion Node

Other Tools for C200 952 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB, contd. Honeywell
• ERDB Host Information

– General information about the server appears in the view pane

– Use the Tools menu to refresh status

Other Tools for C200 953 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB, contd. Honeywell
• A lock dialog box will appear when you attempt to open a locked CM in
Control Builder after an abnormal application termination

Other Tools for C200 954 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB, contd. Honeywell
• ERDB Active Locks allows you to open a locked CM

– Locked CMs in Control Builder appear in the view pane

– Use the Tools menu to clear all locks

Other Tools for C200 955 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB, contd. Honeywell
• CAB Active Locks also allows you to open a locked CM

Other Tools for C200 956 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB, contd. Honeywell
• ERDB Admin Tasks displays the ERDB administration tasks

Other Tools for C200 957 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
ERDB Admin Tasks for Redundant Servers Honeywell
• The following tasks are only available for redundant servers

Other Tools for C200 958 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB Honeywell
• Version control system (VCS) Admin Tasks

Synchronize VCS - Synchronizes the Qualification and Version Control System

database with the Engineering Repository database and clears any QVCS locks.

Backup VCS Database - Creates a backup copy of the current QVCS database as a
".bak" file under the user-specified name and in the user-selected directory location.

Restore VCS Database - Restores the user-selected backup QVCS database

(.bak) in the primary ERDB through the Restore From dialog box.

Other Tools for C200 959 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
Question 2: DBAdmin Tool Honeywell
The DBAdmin tool is:
A) Used for organizing excel
spreadsheets
B) A tool used by operators as
a search engine
C) A utility for maintaining the
ERDB
D) Use to modify tuning parameters
on PID control loops

Correct!
Incorrect.TheTheDBAdmin
DBAdmin tool
tool
is ais utility
a utility
for
The
YourIncorrect.
correct
answer: The DBAdmin
answer is: tool is a utility for
formaintaining
maintainingthe theERDB.
ERDB. The
The ERDB
ERDB
maintaining the ERDB. The ERDB Administrative
Administrative
You must answer tasksthe are carried before
question out
tasks
You did are
not carried
Incorrect
Correct
You -answer
-Click out using
Clickanywhere
answered anywhere
thisthis the
to
question DBAdmin
tocontinue
continue
completely
correctly! tool.
using thecontinuing
DBAdmin tool.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

Other Tools for C200 960 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• The engineering repository database (ERDB):

– Contains logic CMs/SCMs from the C200/C300 controllers

– Is created through Control Builder
– IsTools>system>ER
located at Program Files>Honeywell>Experion PKS>Engineering

– Is administered through DBAdmin, a Configuration Studio utility

Other Tools for C200 961 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe ERDB Administration

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Other Tools for C200 962 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe ERDB Administration 7/5/2023
 Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder
Scripts

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 963 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Create script using the HMIWeb Script Editor

– Test functionality in Station

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 964 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Using the Script Editor

• Writing VB Script
• Rules and Restrictions (General Section)
• Using the Script Data Tab

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 965 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Scripting Language Honeywell
• You can write scripts in either VBScript or JScript
• To set the scripting language:
– Select Tools > Options

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 966 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Scripting Language Honeywell
• On the General tab, select the required language from the “Default
Scripting Language”

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 967 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Scripting Help Honeywell
• To access help, select either:
– Help > VBScript Reference
– Help > JScript Reference

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 968 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Intellisense Option Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 969 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Intellisense Example Honeywell

alpha001.

Example of
Intellisense

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 970 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Script Editor Honeywell
• To open the Script Editor:

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 971 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Objects and Events Honeywell
• Drop-down lists for Objects and Events

Objects Events

Objects and Events will appear in “bold” text if scripted

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 972 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Using the Script Editor

• Writing VB Script
• Rules and Restrictions (General Section)

• Using the Script Data Tab

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 973 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Writing Scripts Honeywell
• To begin writing scripts

Objects Events

If me.fillcolor = vbblue then…

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 974 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Scripting Events Honeywell
• Scripts are event-driven Events

• Displays support event bubbling

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 975 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Chromacode Honeywell
• Scripts are Color Coded (chromacode)

VB Script Grammar
Objects, Properties, Methods and Values
Comments
“Strings”
Syntax Errors

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 976 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Identifying Objects Honeywell
• Explicitly identify an object by using the Object's Name
– rect001.fillcolor = rgb(255,0,0)

• Use VBScript's "me" Keyword if scripting directly on the object

– me.fillcolor = rgb(255,0,0)

• Use the event Object and its srcElement Property if the event relates to
the current object
Sub rect001_onclick
window.event.srcElement.fillcolor = vbRed
End Sub

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 977 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
General Section Honeywell
• General Section

Example Call Statement

Sub rect001_onclick
Call MyFunction (“Hello”)
End Sub

Example Function in General Section

Function MyFunction(text)
Msgbox text
End Function

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 978 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Using the Script Editor

• Writing VB Script


• Rules and Restrictions (General Section)

• Using the Script Data Tab

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 979 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Rules and Restrictions Honeywell
• Rules and Restrictions Applicable to General Section Functions
– Error Handlers must be in the General Section
– Function names must be unique
– Functions cannot use the “me” keyword

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 980 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Using the Script Editor

• Writing VB Script

• Rules and Restrictions (General Section)

• Using the Script Data Tab

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 981 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Configure Script Data Access Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 982 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Script Data Tab Honeywell
• Adding points and parameters to the Script Data Tab:

– Provides access to
point and parameter
data in scripts

– Also allows you to

bind more than one
datapoint value to
access from scripts

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 983 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Using On Demand Update Honeywell
• “On demand” data is only read from the server when requested. Use the
RequestDemandData method:
– “me.RequestDemandData”

• An “ondatachange” event will be fired when the data values are

available

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 984 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Using the Script Data Tab Honeywell

• Add point.parameter data

to Script Data Tab

• Ability to list more than one

datapoint value to access
from scripts

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 985 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Example RequestDemandData Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 986 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Scripting - Object.Value Honeywell
• Note the use of object.value -- not point.parameter

Example script:

Sub alpha001_onchange
If alpha001.value < 10 then
alpha001.title = “PV Low”
Else
alpha001.title = “PV OK”
End If
End Sub

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 987 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Data Tab vs. Script Data Tab Honeywell

Reading data directly from

the alphanumeric object’s
data tab (PV)

Reading data using

script data access

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 988 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell

• You can write scripts in either VBScript or JavaScript

• Use Intellisense to present object.properties while writing code
• Scripts are event driven
• Events are based on object type
• Events and objects will appear in bold text if scripted
• The General Script Section is used to store variables, error handlers and
general-purpose scripts

• The Script Data Tab provides easy access to point.parameter data in

scripts

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 989 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Lab – Restrict Operator Actions Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 990 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Lab – Create a Temp Profile Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 991 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Lab – Use the Script Data Tab Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 992 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the Use and Creation of HMIWeb Display

Builder Scripts

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 993 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 994 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Use and Create HMIWeb Display Builder Scripts 7/5/2023
 Using System Custom Properties and
Scripting Examples

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 995 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will learn how to:
– Define system custom properties

– Test functionality in Station

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 996 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Using System Custom Properties


• Scripting Examples

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 997 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Configure System Custom Properties Honeywell
• System Custom Properties are like variables

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 998 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Custom Properties Tab Honeywell
• Adding points and parameters

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 999 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Data Repositories Honeywell
• Access custom properties via display scripts at runtime
• There are two repositories used for custom properties:
– Display Page repository
– Station Data repository
• All custom properties in both repositories can be accessed via display
script at runtime.
• To access the station repository:
– Window.external.stationDataRepository
• The display data repository is an object on the page so it can be
accessed by:
– DisplayDataRepository

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1000 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Data Indirection Example Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1001 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Assigning Custom Properties Honeywell
• Assign the custom properties in the database link

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1002 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Data Indirection Display Honeywell
• Checking the display in station

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1003 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Using System Custom Properties

• Scripting Examples

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1004 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Scripting Example – Show/Hide Button Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1005 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Scripting Example – Calling a Faceplate Honeywell
• Calling up a Faceplate on an Alarm Condition
– This script simulates an “OnClick” event when an alarm event occurs

Sub alarmstate001_OnDataChange

If me.datavalue(“11_FC02.AlarmValue”) = “ALARM” then

alpha001.click
End if
End Sub

Note the syntax of me.datavalue from the Script Data Tab

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1006 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Building a Faceplate on Alarm Display Honeywell
• Add an alphanumeric to your HMIWeb Display

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1007 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Building a Faceplate on Alarm Display Honeywell
• Add an alarm indicator to your HMIWeb Display

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1008 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Calling a Faceplate on Alarm Honeywell
Sub alarmstate001_OnDataChange
If me.datavalue(“11_FC02.AlarmValue”) = “ALARM” then
alpha001.click
End if
End Sub

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1009 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Scripting Example – Cursor Change Honeywell
• Cursor changes when over pushbuttons
Sub Page_onmouseover
If (Left(window.event.srcElement.id, 10) = "pushbutton") Then
window.event.srcElement.style.cursor = "hand"
End If
End Sub

Sub Page_onmouseout
If (Left(window.event.srcElement.id, 10) = "pushbutton") Then
window.event.srcElement.style.cursor = "auto"
End If
End Sub

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1010 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Scripting Example – Restricting Changes Honeywell
• Restrict Amount of SP Change

Sub alpha001_onchange
If abs(alpha001.currentvalue - alpha001.value) > 10 Then
MsgBox “SP change must be less than 5% of range"
alpha001.CancelChange
End If
End Sub

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1011 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Scripting Example - Tooltips Honeywell
• Adding a Dynamic ToolTip to an Object

Sub alpha1_onchange
If alpha1.value = “ON” then
shape1.title = “Pump is On”
Else
shape1.title = “Pump is Off”
End If
End Sub

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1012 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Script References Honeywell
Useful Web sites and reference books:
Microsoft Web site:
Microsoft provides comprehensive documentation for the DOM and DHTML at its
Web site. At the time of writing, the address is:
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/workshop/author/dhtml/reference/dhtml_
reference_entry.asp

Books:
The following books may be of use, especially if you are new to DHTML and
scripting:
•Dynamic HTML Programmer's Reference Brian Francis, Alex Homer and Chris Ullman

•HTML: The Complete Reference Thomas A. Powell

•Teach Yourself Dynamic HTML In A Week Bruce Campbell and Rick Darnell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1013 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Summary – System Custom Properties Honeywell

• Custom properties in the station repository exist for the lifetime

of Station

• Custom properties in the display repository only exist for the lifetime of
the display page in which they are defined

• Scripts in a display can only access the display scoped custom

properties defined in that display, but they are able to access all station
scoped custom properties

• Changes to station scoped custom properties are automatically reflected

to all other displays using that custom Property

• Custom properties can be defined, used and accessed via scripts in both
popups and faceplates

Window.external.parentDisplay.displayDataRepository

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1014 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Lab - Use System Custom Properties Honeywell
• CustomTrend

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1015 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Lab – Script a Manual Startup Sequence Honeywell

Optional
Lab

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1016 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting

Examples

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1017 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1018 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Using System Custom Properties and Scripting Examples 7/5/2023
 Error Handling

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1019 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Identify Station error handling
– Recognize how to implement error handlers with scripts

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1020 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Error Handling
– Station Error Handling

– OnErrorResumeNext

– Custom Error Handlers


• Error Handlers - Example


• Using the Script Data DataExists() Property

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1021 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Station Error Handling Honeywell
• Station performs basic error handling the first time an error occurs

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1022 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
OnErrorResumeNext Honeywell
• Ignores the error

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1023 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Custom Error Handlers Honeywell
• Use the ScriptErrorHandler property of the Page object
– Page.ScriptErrorHandler = “MyErrorHandler”

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1024 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Error Handling
– Station Error Handling

– OnErrorResumeNext

– Custom Error Handlers


• Error Handlers - Examples

• Using the Script Data DataExists() Property

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1025 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Error Handling Examples Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1026 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Error Handling – General Section Honeywell

Error handlers
must be located
in the General
section

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1027 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
General Script Section Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1028 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Custom Error Handler Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1029 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
OnErrorResumeNext Example Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1030 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Unhandled Error Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1031 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
OnErrorResumeNext with Message Box Honeywell

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1032 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
OnErrorResumeNext with Message Zone Honeywell

window.external.messagezonetext

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1033 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Error Handling
– Station Error Handling

– OnErrorResumeNext

– Custom Error Handlers

• Error Handlers - Examples


• Using the Script Data DataExists() Property

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1034 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Script Data DataExists() Property Honeywell

• DataExists() property provides an effective error handling mechanism

• DataExists() property allows script to check if a particular Point/ Parameter
exists on the Script Data tab
• Previously, generic scripts were used which query for script data values
– In the absence of a point/parameter on the Script Data tab, an error
is generated
– This error was then handled using the ‘On Error Resume Next’ property
– This approach resulted in performance issues
• The ‘DataExists’ property allows scripts to avoid generating errors and helps
achieve better performance

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1035 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Example 1 Honeywell
• Script written for a pushbutton
– Uses the Script Data tab for points and parameters

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1036 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Example 1 (continued) Honeywell
• DataExists():
– The script will check if the Point/Parameter exists on the Script Data tab and
display a message
Data value is
displayed for a point
present on the Script
Data tab

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1037 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Example 1 (continued) Honeywell
• DataExists():
– The script will check if the Point/Parameter exists on the Script Data tab and
display a message

When point/parameter is not

present on the Script Data tab

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1038 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Example 2 Honeywell
• Script written using DataExists()

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1039 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Example 2 (continued) Honeywell

• DataExists()

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1040 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Example Honeywell
• Message box generated by DataExists()

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1041 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell


• Put all error handlers in the General section


• Create “CustomErrorHandlers” to trap errors


• To call an error handler, use the syntax

– Page.ScriptErrorHandler = “YourErrorHandlerName”


• Use OnErrorResumeNext to ignore errors and keep the script executing


• Station performs “basic” error handling if no error handling has been
implemented in script


• The Script data DataExists() property can be used instead of the
OnErrorResumeNext for better display performance

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1042 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe Error Handling

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the scripting lab exercises

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1043 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics
Error Handling 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

HMIWeb Display Builder Scripting - 1 1044 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Error Handling 7/5/2023
 Describe the Configuration of SCMs

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1045 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn about sequential control modules (SCMs)

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:

– Build and edit SCMs

– Configure transition and

step function blocks

– Configure step timing

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1046 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• SCMs:

– Provide phase-level batch functionality

– Command regulatory and discrete function blocks, contained within control

modules in a defined order, to accomplish higher-level tasks (for example,
boiler startup)

– Contain the following function blocks:

• Transitions that determine when to proceed

• Steps that take action

• Handlers for specified exceptions

• Synchronization for parallel execution

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1047 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Rules for Building SCMs

• SCM Transitions
• SCM Steps
• Step Timing
• SCM Code Examples

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1048 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Rules Honeywell
• Rule 1 – Every SCM begins with an Invoke Transition

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1049 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Rules, contd. Honeywell
• Rule 2 – SCMs can have multiple endings

Candy Step

Add Add Grape

Ship It
Chocolate Flavor

END END END

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1050 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Rules, contd. Honeywell
• Rule 3 – Generally logic shall be made with Transitions and steps in
alternate in SCM; however,
• Step to Step connection is allowed in SCMs in R300
• Transition to Transition Connections are still NOT allowed

Red X, when
activated,
indicates an
error

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1051 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Example Honeywell

Transition

Step

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1052 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Question 1: Building an SCM Honeywell
An SCM begins with:
A) A project identification number
B) An END statement
C) An invoke transition
D) A transition

The correct
Your answer:answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! SCMs
SCMsbegin
beginwith
withinvoke
invoke
You must answer the question before
transitions.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1053 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Rules for Building SCMs

• SCM Transitions
• SCM Steps

• Step Timing

• SCM Code Examples

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1054 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Transitions Honeywell
• Transitions:

– Evaluate if the sequential control module is ready to advance to the next

step

– Ask questions
?

• You can define:

Logic gates
– Up to 10 conditions per transition

– 4 logic gates per transition

• 3 primary

• 1 secondary

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1055 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Transitions, contd. Honeywell

Transition condition descriptions

Selectable

Transitions determine when to proceed

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1056 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Transitions, contd. Honeywell

Transition conditions (code)

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1057 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Rules for Building SCMs

• SCM Transitions

• SCM Steps
• Step Timing

• SCM Code Examples

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1058 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Steps Honeywell
• Steps perform actions and send output commands to control module
function blocks

• Note: the control module’s mode attribute must be “Program”

• You can define up to 16 individual outputs/actions per step

• Minimum and maximum wait times are supported

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1059 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Steps, contd. Honeywell

Step output descriptions

Selectable

Steps take actions

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1060 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Steps, contd. Honeywell

Step outputs (code)

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1061 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Question 2: Transitions vs. Steps Honeywell
Transitions and Steps:

A) Are identical to PID function blocks

B) Generally alternate in an SCM, if

required, Step to Step connection
is valid

C) Cannot be used in an SCM

D) Are built using Quick Builder

Incorrect!
Correct! Generally,
Generally,Transitions
Transitionsand
andSteps
Stepsare
areto
to
alternate within the SCM. However, in Experion
Release 300, step to step connection is allowed. But
transition to transition connections are still NOT
Yourcorrect
The answer:answer is:
allowed.
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
totocontinue
continue
completely
Clickcontinuing
anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1062 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Rules for Building SCMs

• SCM Transitions

• SCM Steps

• Step Timing
• SCM Code Examples

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1063 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Step Timing Honeywell

Minimum Maximum
Wait Time Active Time

• Min Wait Time

– Specifies how long to delay evaluation of succeeding Transition block after
step output are stored. If Execution period is 50 milliseconds and Min Wait
Time is 100, the start of succeeding Transition is delayed by 5000 ms (5 s)
• Max Active Time
– The maximum number of execution cycles that the steps can be active
before an SCM Step Alarm is generated

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1064 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Step Timing, contd. Honeywell

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1065 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• Rules for Building SCMs

• SCM Transitions

• SCM Steps

• Step Timing

• SCM Code Examples

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1066 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Additional Code Examples Honeywell
• SCM235.HISTVALUE[1] := (CM151.PIDA.PV + CM251.PIDA.PV) / 2

• MESSAGES.XFERB.SENDFL[3] := 1

• CM235.PIDA.SP:=AVG (MIN(CM1.REGCALC.X[1],
CM1.REGCALC.X[2], CM1.REGCALC.X[3]), MAX(CM1.REGCALCX[1],
CM1.REGCALC.X[2], CM1.REGCALC.X[3]))

• CM456.PIDA.SP := (CM456.SPREC1FLAG.PVFL) ?
SCM457.RECTARGET[1] : SCM457.RECTARGET[2]

• CM456.PIDA.SP := (CM456.SPREC1FLAG.PVFL) ?
SCM457.RECTARGET[1] : NOP

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1067 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• A Sequential Control Module (SCM):

– Commands regulatory and discrete function blocks contained within Control

Modules in a defined order to accomplish higher-level tasks

– Begins with an Invoke Transition

– Can have multiple endings

– Generally have alternating Transitions and Steps, if more than 16

outputs/actions are required, then Step to Step block connection is valid

– Contains:

• Transition function blocks that evaluate if the Sequential Control Module

is ready to advance to the next step

• Step function blocks that perform actions and send output commands to
Control Module function blocks

– Can have min and max wait times added to steps. Remember, wait times
are in execution cycles of the SCM itself and NOT in minutes or seconds
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1068 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the Configuration of Sequential Control Modules (SCMs)

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1069 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1070 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Describe the Configuration of SCMs 7/5/2023
 Identify SCM Programming Techniques

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1071 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn to add functionality to Sequential Control
Modules (SCMs)

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to describe the purpose
and operation of:

– Branching and looping functionality

– Parallel execution functionality

– Exception handlers

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1072 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• SCM Branching and Looping


• SCM Parallel Execution


• SCM Exception Handlers

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1073 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Branching Honeywell
Example of SCM Branching

NextComp Pins
STEP
(1) (2) (3)

TRANSITION A TRANSITION B TRANSITION C

STEP

TRANSITION

STEP

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1074 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Looping Honeywell
• Recommended
Example of SCM Looping
– End with a Transition then loop back
into a Step/Phase
• Not recommended
STEP
– Loop from Step/Phase back to always
true transition
– Loop back to the default invoke transition
TRANSITION
– Loop from a parallel section to non TRANSITION
parallel section
– Loop from a non-parallel section to a STEP
parallel section

TRANSITION

STEP

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1075 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• SCM Branching and Looping


• SCM Parallel Execution

• SCM Exception Handlers

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1076 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Question 1: SCM Branching Honeywell
At which SCM function block
does branching occur?

A) Handler
B) Step
C) Synchronization
D) Transition

The correct
Your answer:answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! Branching
Branchingoccurs
occursat ataastep.
step.
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1077 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Parallel Step Execution Honeywell

TRANSITION

TRANSITION
NEXTCOMP PINS SYNC

STEP
STEP STEP

TRANSITION
TRANSITION

STEP
STEP STEP

TRANSITION
SYNC

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1078 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Synchronization Block Honeywell
• A synchronization (sync) block
TRANSITION
begins and ends a parallel step
execution
SYNC • The end synchronization block:

– Monitors the execution status of

each parallel path
STEP STEP
– Terminates the thread when the
execution of the path completes
TRANSITION TRANSITION
– Starts one or several new threads
when all the preceding parallel
STEP STEP paths complete execution

SYNC

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1079 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Synchronization Block, contd. Honeywell
• A synchronization block can have
TRANSITION
a maximum of 10 threads

SYNC • Nested synchronization blocks are

permitted

STEP STEP – Nested levels are limited to 9 due

to the limit of 10 threads per
synchronization block
TRANSITION TRANSITION

STEP STEP

SYNC

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1080 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Question 2: Parallel Step Execution Honeywell
Parallel step execution begins with which of the following blocks?

A) Handler HANDLER
B) Step
C) Synchronization STEP

D) Transition
SYNC

TRANSITION

The
Your correct
answer:
Incorrect.
Correct! answer
Parallel is:
Parallelstep
stepexecution
executionbegins
beginswith
withaa
You must Synchronization
answer the question before
block.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1081 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• SCM Branching and Looping

• SCM Parallel Execution


• SCM Exception Handlers

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1082 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Exception Handlers Honeywell
• Exception handlers are transitions and steps that run only after specified
conditions have been met

• An SCM can have multiple handlers but only one handler of each type
may be active at any given time

• Handler types, in priority order, are:

– Abort
– Stop
– Hold
– Restart
Handler priority
– Interrupt
– Check
– Main

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1083 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Exception Handlers, contd. Honeywell
• Handlers can be classified into three categories:

– Internal (Null, Edit)

– Normal (Main, Check, Interrupt)

– Abnormal (Restart, Stop, Hold, Abort)

CHECK

MAIN
INTERRUPT

HOLD STOP

RESTART ABORT

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1084 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Interrupt Handler Honeywell
• Interrupts the activity of the main handler, acting like a subroutine of the
main handler
• When it completes, the program activity returns to the last step in the
main handler that had the Update Restart Address option ON

Used for normal process handling

Example: Making tomato soup –

tomatoes have an unknown cook time
due to variations in water content
CHECK
Interrupt trigger condition - viscosity < 55
Handler - heat till viscosity > 60 MAIN Interrupt

HOLD STOP

RESTART ABORT

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1085 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Hold and Restart Handlers Honeywell
• The hold handler preempts the activity of the main and/or interrupt
handlers.
– The stop and abort handlers can preempt the hold handler.
– From the hold handler you can go to the restart, stop, or abort handler.
• The restart handler can only be initiated from the held state.
– It returns the activity to the main/interrupt handler at the last step with the
Update Restart Address checked.

CHECK Used for an abnormal process condition

MAIN
Example: Loss of steam
Hold trigger condition - wax temperature < 120
Hold STOP

Restart Handler – pump tank contents to preheat tank

INTERRUPT
Restart – preheat tank temperature > 125

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1086 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Restart Address Honeywell

Program execution will begin at the last

checked Update Restart Address (step)
when returning from an interrupt or
hold/restart handler call

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1087 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Abort Handler Honeywell
• Preempts the activity of the main, interrupt, restart, hold, or stop handlers
• Cannot be preempted
• From the abort handler, you can only return to the check handler

Used for an abnormal process condition

Example: milk overheated

Abort trigger condition – milk temperature > 198

Handler – dump tanks to waste

CHECK

MAIN
INTERRUPT

HOLD STOP

RESTART Abort

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1088 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Stop Handler Honeywell
• Preempts the activity of the main/interrupt, restart, or hold handler

• Abort handler can preempt the stop handler

• From the stop handler, you can go automatically to the abort or check
handler or by command to the hold handler

CHECK

MAIN
INTERRUPT

HOLD Stop

RESTART ABORT

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1089 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Check Handler Honeywell
• The SCM executes the check handler just before entering the IDLE state

• On initial entry to the SCM, the check handler is executed as soon as

the SCM is activated
• The SCM also returns to the check handler after a RESET command or
when the conditions for the check handler are met after the stop handler,
main handler, or abort handler is completed
• A configured check handler can be used to initialize process equipment
and/or reset values for a new activity
Example: Check
Reset totalizers, historize values, etc.
MAIN INTERRUPT

HOLD STOP

RESTART ABORT

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1090 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Question 3: Exception Handlers Honeywell
All of these are abnormal handlers except:
A) Abort
CHECK
B) Hold
C) Stop MAIN INTERRUPT

D) Main HOLD STOP

RESTART ABORT

TheIncorrect.
YourCorrect!
correct
answer: All
Allare
answerareabnormal
abnormalhandlers
is: handlers
except "Main".
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1091 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• Functionality you may add to an SCM includes:

– Branching, which occurs at a step and allows the SCM to take different
paths based on the first true transition found

– Parallel
block
step execution, which begins and ends with a synchronization (sync)

• The end synchronization block starts one or several new threads when
all the preceding parallel paths complete execution

– Exception handlers, which are transitions and steps that run only after
specified conditions have been met

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1092 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Identify SCM Programming Techniques

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1093 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1094 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Identify SCM Programming Techniques 7/5/2023
 Explain the Operation of SCMs

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1095 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn about the
operation of SCMs

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you

will be able to:

– Describe the recipe and history data

that can be stored for an SCM

– Explain the process an SCM follows

when it is activated

– Describe the operation of an SCM as it

appears in the station chart tab

– Identify the SCM execution modes

– Identify the SCM event options

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1096 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• SCM Recipes and History

• SCM Activation and Operation
• SCM Modes and Event Options

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1097 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules - Recipes Honeywell
• A maximum of 50 recipe values can be stored for an SCM
• Recipe data can include:
– Descriptors
– SP, PV access locks
– Scaling options
– High and low limits
– Default values
– Display and print options

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1098 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules - History Honeywell
• A maximum of 50 history parameter values can be stored for an SCM

• Process data can be collected and stored during SCM operation

• History data will include:

– Parameter descriptor

– Parameter types

– Parameter value

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1099 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Question 1: SCM Recipes and History Honeywell
Process data can be collected and
stored during SCM operation:
A) Using a maximum of 50
history parameters
B) Using a maximum of 500
parameters
C) To send information to the
SCM prior to execution
D) To upload recipe values
when an SCM runs to
completion

The correct
Your answer: answer is:
Yes!
No.
YouProcess
Process data
data can
must answer can
thebebe collected
collected
question and
and
before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
notduring
stored -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
SCM question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
operation continue
completely
using a
continuing
maximum of 50 history parameters.

Click anywhere to continue. Submit Clear

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1100 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• SCM Recipes and History

• SCM Activation and Operation

• SCM Modes and Event Options

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1101 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – SCM Activation Honeywell

INACTIVE RESUME
(1st State After Download)

ACTIVE INACTIVE

IDLE RESET VALIDATED

RESET START RESET

COMPLETE RUNNING ABORT ABORTED

INTERRUPT STOP HOLD RESTART ABORT

HOLD
INTERRUPTING STOPPED HELD
STOP

RESET ABORT

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1102 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Chart Visualization Honeywell

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1103 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Chart Visualization, contd. Honeywell

Green indicates a “true”

transition condition

Blue indicates a transition or

step is complete
Colors indicate the current status
of the outputs on a step:
• Blue indicates complete
• Red indicates a communication
failure
• Green Indicates an executing
output
• Yellow (not shown) indicates a
range crossover

Green indicates a
transition or step is active

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1104 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Question 2: SCM Activation and Operation Honeywell
Which statement is false? When
operating an SCM, you must always:

A) Reset to return to Idle

B) Return to Idle before Inactive
C) Invoke an exception handler
from Running

Incorrect.
TheCorrect!
Your correct
answer:The
Thefalse
answer false
is:statement
statementisis""When
When
operating an SCM, you must always invoke
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
didexception
an You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
handler question
correctly!
fromto
tocontinue
continue
completely
running".
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1105 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• SCM Recipes and History

• SCM Activation and Operation

• SCM Modes and Event Options

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1106 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Modes Honeywell
• Execution Modes
– Automatic

• Run to “Complete,” no normal interruptions

– Semi-automatic

• Pause after each step, wait for Resume command

– Single step

• Pause after each step, wait for Resume command

and do next step

• Manual Mode stops SCM execution

• Normal Mode used with operator or GUS keyboard

NORM key to go to an SCM’s configured execution
mode

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1107 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Sequential Control Modules – Event Options Honeywell
• SCM Alarm and Event tab:

• Step Alarm and Event tab:

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1108 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Question 3: SCM Modes Honeywell
Which mode pauses the SCM after each step,
waits for the resume command, and upon resuming,
completes the next step?

A) Automatic
B) Normal
C) Semi-automatic
D) Single step

Incorrect. The 'Single Step' mode pauses the SCM

The
Your
aftercorrect
answer: answer is:of each step and waits for the
the completion
You must
resume answerupon
command, the question
resuming, before
completes the
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
next step.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1109 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• An SCM:
– Can contain up to 50:
• Sets of recipe parameters, such as descriptors and SP and PV access
locks, which are accessible from the SCM detail display once the SCM is
active
• History parameters including parameter descriptors, types and values
that are collected and stored during SCM operation

– Status is indicated using state descriptors, such as inactive, idle, running,

and stopped, for which specific paths must be followed

– Can be viewed and operated from the station chart tab which shows the
status of transitions and steps using colors such as blue which indicates a
transition or step is complete
– Has modes of operation that include automatic, semi-automatic, single step,
manual, and normal

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1110 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Lab Examples – 1 of 7 Honeywell
• Configure a Sequential Control Module (SCM) (20)

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1111 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Lab Examples – 2 of 7 Honeywell
• Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1112 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Lab Examples – 3 of 7 Honeywell
• Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1113 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Lab Examples – 4 of 7 Honeywell
• Configure SCM Abort Sequence

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1114 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Lab Examples – 5 of 7 Honeywell
• Use a Step to Start another SCM

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1115 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Lab Examples – 6 of 7 Honeywell
• Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow

VALVE_CHECK

CIRCULATE2

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1116 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Lab Examples – 7 of 7 Honeywell
• Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox

VALVE_CHECK

CIRCULATE2

PROCESS

RUN_PROCESS

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1117 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Explain the Operation of SCMs

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Configure a Sequential Control Module - Basic (20) and

Configure Sequential Control Modules - Advanced lab exercises

Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use 1118 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE
Explain the Operation of SCMs 7/5/2023
 SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts

SafeView 1119 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• SafeView allows you to design and manage the placement of windows
in an Experion PKS Station

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will

be able to:
– Identify SafeView window architecture and
Station setup
– Explain Workspace Group types and
workspace indicators
– Describe match expressions

SafeView 1120 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Working with SafeView


• Workspace groups and indicators


• Designing a match expression

SafeView 1121 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
SafeView Architecture Honeywell
• Multi-window Station:

– Makes multiple Station

displays visible at the
same time

– Uses the SafeView

application to manage
the placement of
displays and windows

• A maximum of 16 Station
displays can be managed

SafeView 1122 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
SafeView Architecture Honeywell
• A SafeView workspace
manages groups of
windows

• This First Match workspace

contains multiple groups
Group 1 Group 2

– One group must be the

main group

– The remaining groups are

subgroups of the main
group

Group 3

First Match Workspace

SafeView 1123 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Station Setup Honeywell

• To configure a Station as
single window or multi-
window, select Station >
Connection Properties

• Note: SafeView must be

active on the Station for a
multi-window station to start

SafeView 1124 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Station Setup – Multi-Window Honeywell
• Define the number of displays in
the display pool

– Applicable only if you use multi-

window mode. Specifies the
maximum number of displays
that can be visible
simultaneously.

• Note: Adding too many displays

to the pool will create CPU
consuming processes in the
background

SafeView 1125 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Station Startup with SafeView Honeywell
• Station will start with two windows - a MainWindow and a StatusWindow
• Create an appropriate SafeView workspace to manage the placement
and behavior of these windows and displays
• Each display called can appear in a new window

Window with Station Menu, Toolbar,

Command Zone, and Message Zone
Category (“HSC_Station_MainWindow”)

Window with Alarm Zone and Station Zone

Category (“HSC_Station_StatusWindow”)

SafeView 1126 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Working with SafeView


• Workspace groups and indicators

• Designing a match expression

SafeView 1127 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Workspace Groups Honeywell
• SafeView allows you to configure three different workspace group types:

Round Manual
Robin Select

First Match

Match
Trends

Match
Process
Displays

SafeView 1128 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Round Robin Honeywell
• A window replacement style in which the newest application
automatically replaces the oldest one
• The first application will be displayed in window 1, the second in window
2, the third in window 3, and the fourth in window 4
• When the operator requests a fifth application, it replaces the oldest one
which is the display in window 1
Round
Robin

SafeView 1129 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Workspace Indicators Honeywell
• Workspace indicators:

– Show graphically which window is the next to be replaced

– Are located in the title area of a managed window

– Are configured separately for each window

SafeView 1130 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Output Focus Workspace Indicator Honeywell
• Output Focus is the term used to define the window that is currently
selected
• This is the window of output focus

• In a Round Robin group, SafeView automatically changes the window of

output focus
• The operator can also change the window of output focus manually by
selecting the output focus button on the desired window
• After displaying the application in the manually selected window, normal
Round Robin replacement behavior continues

SafeView 1131 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Global Output Focus Workspace Indicator Honeywell
• Global Output Focus allows the operator to override the Round Robin
automatic replacement

• When this button is selected, all applications are displayed in this

window
• Round Robin replacement does not continue until the global output
focus button is deselected

SafeView 1132 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Lock Workspace Indicator Honeywell
• The lock function allows the operator to take a window out of the Round
Robin automatic replacement

• For example, if window 3 is locked, the Round Robin automatic

replacement will be window 1, window 2, and window 4

SafeView 1133 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Other Workspace Indicators Honeywell
• Other workspace indicators include the standard Microsoft Windows
buttons:

– Minimize moves the window to the taskbar as an icon

– Maximize gives a full view of the window

– Close will completely close the window

SafeView 1134 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Manual Select Honeywell
• A window replacement style in
which the operator:

– Manages where the displays appear

– Manually selects the window of

output focus
Manual
Select

• If the operator does not select a

different window as the window of
output focus, the next application
will replace the previously displayed
application

SafeView 1135 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
First Match Honeywell
• A window replacement style in which each window, in the group, can
display its own type of displays or applications, independent of each
other

First Match

Match
Trends

Match
Process
Displays

• In a First Match group, each window has a match expression

SafeView 1136 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Working with SafeView

• Workspace groups and indicators


• Designing a match expression

SafeView 1137 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Designing a Match Expression Honeywell
• Match expressions determine whether SafeView will manage an
application

category ("?trend?") or module ("?word?")

Match Expression

• SafeView uses match expressions to determine which group of windows

in Round Robin or Manual Select, or which individual window in First
Match, will display particular displays or applications

• When an application is invoked, SafeView looks for a match at the group

or window level and, if it finds one, the application is displayed in the
appropriate window

SafeView 1138 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Designing a Match Expression Honeywell
• If SafeView does not find a match for an invoked application, the
application is displayed in a window that is not managed

SafeView 1139 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Match Expressions Honeywell
• For a Round Robin or Manual Select group, there is a single match
expression for the entire group that applies to all windows in that group

Round Robin

Manual Select

SafeView 1140 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Catch-all Expressions Honeywell
• A catch-all match expression:
– Will match any display
regardless of category, title,
or module
– Will cause displays, that can be
managed, to be managed by
SafeView
– Can be used in a Round Robin,
Manual Select or First Match
group

– Uses all wild cards (“?*”)

Example: Round
Robin Catch-all
Match Expression

SafeView 1141 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Match Expressions – First Match Honeywell
• A First Match group has a separate match expression for each window
in a group

Match
Trends

Catch-
all

• Note: If you use a catch-

all statement in a First
Match group, be sure to
put it as the LAST defined
window

SafeView 1142 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Default – First Match Honeywell
• The default match
expression

– First Match group example

– Match expression category

The Default Match Expression

will match category(“?”)

SafeView 1143 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
SafeView Categories Honeywell
• To manage displays
effectively within
SafeView, assign
categories to them
– Standard categories are
provided

– User-created categories
may be added by
modifying the
WindowCategories.xml
file in the HMIWeb
Display Builder folder

SafeView 1144 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Types of Match Expressions Honeywell
• A match expression can match an application in one of three ways:
1. Category
• Matches the SafeView
window category
on the Details tab of a display
• Example: category(“trend”)

2. Title
• Matches the characters on
the title bar of an application

• Example:
title(“?*Overview?*”) or
title(“?*Word?*”)

SafeView 1145 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Types of Match Expressions Honeywell

3. Module
• Matches the EXACT file name
of an application program [.exe]
as seen in Windows (Use wild
cards)

• Example:
module(“?*word?*”) or
module(“?*Station.exe?*”)

SafeView 1146 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Wild Cards Honeywell
• Wild cards are special characters that can be used in match expressions
to capture multiple displays with similar names

Character Definition
? Matches any single character
* Matches any number (zero or
more) of the previous character

SafeView 1147 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Logical Operators Honeywell
• Logical operators such as AND, OR, and NOT can be used in match
expressions for more flexibility

AND Requires a display to match multiple Example:

match expressions. category("?overview?)
Use only in expressions with wild cards. and category("?trend?)
Otherwise, no displays will match the
expression.

OR Allows a display to match any one of Example:

multiple match expressions category("overview")
or category("trend")

NOT Requires expression. Example:

This allows the user to exclude displays category("?overview?)
from a match. Generally, use this with and not
AND, not OR. category("?trend?)

SafeView 1148 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When you design multi-window workspaces with Safeview, remember:

 – SafeView can manage a maximum of 16 displays

 – You can configure three different workspace types -- Round Robin, Manual
Select and First Match

 – SafeView uses match expressions to determine the group match in Round

Robin or Manual Select, and individual window matches in First Match

 – A match expression can manage an application in one of three ways --

category, title or module

SafeView 1149 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

SafeView 1150 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Concepts 7/5/2023
 SafeView Workspace Functions -
Configuration

SafeView 1151 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In the previous lesson, you learned about the SafeView architecture and
Station setup, workspace group types, workspace indicators, and match
expressions

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be

able to:
– Identify window properties
– Identify SafeView workspace considerations

– Start SafeView and load a workspace

SafeView 1152 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• SafeView window properties


• SafeView workspace considerations


• Starting SafeView

SafeView 1153 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Window Properties Honeywell

• Window properties:

– Configurable values

– Control many aspects

of window behavior
and appearance

– Entered for each

window in a workspace

SafeView 1154 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Initial Position Honeywell

• Initial position defines the upper-

left-hand corner of the window
relative to the upper-left-hand
corner of the workspace in pixels

• If the window is draggable, it can

be moved from its initial position,
after SafeView loads the
workspace

• If this position violates other

window constraints, such as
region, the window position is
modified to make it conform

SafeView 1155 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Initial Size Honeywell

• Initial size defines the initial

width and height of the window in
pixels

• If the window is sizeable, the size

can be changed after SafeView
loads the workspace

• If this size violates other window

constraints, such as region, the
window size is modified to make it
conform

SafeView 1156 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Minimum Size Honeywell

• Minimum size defines the minimum

width and height for a window in
pixels

Minimum width is 120 pixels

• Does not apply to a minimized
window
Minimum
height is
26 pixels Minimum width is 102 pixels

Minimum
height is
Round Robin 26 pixels

First Match, Manual Select

SafeView 1157 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Maximum Size Honeywell

• Maximum size defines the

maximum width and height for a
window in pixels

• Applies to a window:

– That is sized by dragging the

window borders

– Or, whose Maximize button is

selected

• If a window is not sizeable, this

entry is not meaningful

SafeView 1158 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Group Region Override Honeywell

• A region:
– Is the area in which a window can be dragged
– Is only useful for windows that are draggable

• Can be defined at the group level or window level

– At the group level, it applies to all windows in the group
– At the window level, it applies only to that window and overrides the group
level definition, if one exists

SafeView 1159 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Minimize Buttons Honeywell

• Minimize option determines

whether or not the minimize
button will be selectable in this
window

• If the button is not selectable, the

window cannot be minimized

SafeView 1160 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Maximize Button Honeywell

• Maximized position defines the

origin of a window with a
selectable maximize button

• X, Y is the distance from the

upper-left-hand corner of the
workspace to the upper-left-hand
corner of the window defined in
pixels

SafeView 1161 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Draggable, Closable Honeywell

• Draggable determines whether

or not a window is allowed to be
dragged

• Closable determines whether or

not the Close button will be
selectable in this window

SafeView 1162 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Placeholders Honeywell

• Placeholder determines what an

operator will see when no
application is being displayed in the
window

– If selected, the operator will see a

blank window with a title bar, border
and white background

– If not selected, the operator will see

a standard PC desktop

• Note: If placeholder is selected, the

engineer can position and size the
windows at build-time using the
placeholders

SafeView 1163 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Multiple Windows Honeywell

• If multiple windows are not allowed

and a new application is called in the
window, the application previously
displayed is closed
• If allowed, application windows will be
stacked on top of each other
• This option is only available on
windows in First Match groups

SafeView 1164 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Sizeable Honeywell

• Sizeable determines whether or not

the operator will be allowed to size the
window
– Yes - must be selected if the operator
is to maximize or normalize the
window

– No - operator will still be able to

select the Maximize button, but it will
have no effect

– Default - the application has control

and the selection on the application
window determines whether or not
the window is sizeable

SafeView 1165 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Always on Top Honeywell

• Always on Top determines the

priority of the window relative to
its placement in front of or
behind other windows

SafeView 1166 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Window properties


• SafeView workspace considerations

• Starting SafeView

SafeView 1167 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Workspace Strategy Honeywell

• Workspace strategy –
design workspace to
meet Operator’s window
management needs

– Configuration of groups
or subgroups for
searching and matching
window specifications

– Configuration of
workspace indicators

SafeView 1168 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Workspace Example - RR Honeywell

• Round Robin example:

– The group manages all display

categories and applications

– The workspace indicators do

not allow the operator to
close the windows

Round Robin Workspace

SafeView 1169 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Workspace Example - FM Honeywell
• This multiple group workspace
contains:
– The main group, First Match,
First Match Manual Select configured for Window1
main group sub-group through Window4

– A sub-group, Manual Select,

configured for trend1 through
Round Robin trend4
sub-group

– The Round Robin alarm

windows, a sub-group,
First Match Multiple Group Workspace configured to catch all displays
that are not defined for any of
the groups

SafeView 1170 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Configuring Windows Honeywell

• Design your workspace for:

– The applications or displays

that will appear in the
windows
– The screen resolution

– The available screen height,

given the taskbar is 28
pixels

– The Status bar is 57 pixels

and the menu/command
area of Station is 100 pixels

First Match Multiple Group Workspace

SafeView 1171 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Window properties

• SafeView workspace considerations


• Starting SafeView

SafeView 1172 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Starting SafeView Honeywell

Desktop
Shortcut

Start → Programs → Honeywell

Experion PKS → SafeView → SafeView

SafeView 1173 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Starting SafeView Honeywell

• Use the Run command:

– C:\Program Files\Honeywell\SafeView\SafeView.exe

SafeView 1174 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
SafeView Control Panel Honeywell

• The Control Panel is:

– The first menu that appears when you start SafeView
– Used to perform a number of workspace management functions

SafeView 1175 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Load Workspace Honeywell
• Click Load Workspace to browse for the workspace file to load

Note: Ctrl+Alt+W will recall a hidden Control Panel

SafeView 1176 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Example Workspaces Honeywell

Main Window
Round Robin Workspace

First Match Multiple Group Workspace

Status Window

Multiple Display
Windows

SafeView 1177 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When you design multi-window displays for an Experion PKS screen
with Safeview, remember:

 – Window properties are entered for each window in a workspace

 – To develop a SafeView workspace strategy which includes groups,

subgroups and workspace indicators that meets the operator’s window
management needs

 – You must start the SafeView application first, before you can load a specific
workspace

SafeView 1178 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Lab Exercise - RR Honeywell

Window 1 Window 2

Window 4 Window 3

SafeView 1179 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Lab Exercise - FM Honeywell

SafeView 1180 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the SafeView lab exercise

SafeView 1181 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

SafeView 1182 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

SafeView Workspace Functions - Configuration 7/5/2023
 Describe Interactive Instructions

Interactive Instructions 1183 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn to
operate and configure Interactive
Instructions for a Sequential
Control Module (SCM)

• At the conclusion of this lesson,

you will know how to:

– Navigate Table View

– Operate an SCM Using Table

View

– Configure an SCM for informed

operation

Interactive Instructions 1184 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell


• Navigating Table View


• Operating an SCM in Table View


• Configuring an SCM for Informed Operation in Table View

Interactive Instructions 1185 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Chart View and Table View Honeywell
• Chart View
• Table View Chart / Table View Toggle

Interactive Instructions 1186 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
SCM Table View Structure Honeywell

SCM’s
Summary Phase,
Pane Step/
Transition
Detail
Pane

Minitrend Additional
Pane Detail Pane

Key Parameters Pane

Interactive Instructions 1187 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Question 1: Table View Honeywell
Control Builder table view:
A) Is used by operators to sign on to
Experion
B) Is an SCM as viewed in a
spreadsheet
C) Is another way to view and
operate SCMs
D) Requires video camera

The correct
Your answer:answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! The
TheTable
Tableview
viewisisanother
anotherwaywayto
toview
viewand
and
You must answer the
operate question
SCMs. before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

Interactive Instructions 1188 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Navigating Table View


• Operating an SCM in Table View

• Configuring an SCM for Informed Operation in Table View

Interactive Instructions 1189 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – Operation Buttons Honeywell
Toggle Table/Chart View Expand/Collapse Instructions
Automatic Tracking Bypass Output
Go to Selected Step INFO Filter
SCM Command Completed Filter

Print Option Flow/List View

Filters and Settings

Interactive Instructions 1190 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instruction – Table View (Flow/List View) Honeywell
• List View
• Flow View
List/Flow View selection

Interactive Instructions 1191 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – Step Symbols Honeywell

Interactive Instructions 1192 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – Step Symbols, contd. Honeywell

Interactive Instructions 1193 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Step and Transition Box Colors Honeywell
Step Execution Status (Box Color):
White – Step is not yet started
Green – Step is executing
Teal – Step complete, waiting for trailing
transition
Dark blue – Step has been executed
Yellow – Step execution has started and
warning exists
Red – Step execution has started and
error exists
Magenta – Some outputs were not Transition Status (Box
completed when the step was left Color):
White – Transition is not
yet active or complete
Green – At least one of
the transitions is
evaluated
Red – an error exists in
one of the transitions

Interactive Instructions 1194 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instruction – Table View Details Honeywell

Click on
Step
Step
Outputs
Show in
Details
Confirmable Instruction Pane

Interactive Instructions 1195 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – Details Honeywell

Current Parameter

Monitor Task
Parameter

Interactive Instructions 1196 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instruction – Entry Value – Station view Honeywell

Trend Current
Parameter for Step
Output

Indication for parameters

configured in Trend with
color legends

Interactive Instructions 1197 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – Details Honeywell

Interactive Instructions 1198 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instruction – Operator Interaction Honeywell
• Warnings, Notes, Instructions, Expressions and Comments

This program will wait until the 11_PC15 PV is

between 1235 and 1245 KPag before it continues

Interactive Instructions 1199 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Navigating Table View

• Operating an SCM in Table View


• Configuring an SCM for Informed Operation in Table View

Interactive Instructions 1200 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – Main Tab Step Configuration Honeywell

• Step Configuration Main Tab

– Edit Warning/Note
– Enforce Order
– Step-Level Confirmation

Interactive Instructions 1201 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – Step Settings Configuration Honeywell

Interactive Instructions 1202 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – Output Instruction Tab Honeywell

• Output Instruction Tab

– Instruction Type
– Target Parameter
– Current Parameter
– Entry Parameter
– Monitor Task
– Role

Interactive Instructions 1203 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – Output Instruction Tab, contd. Honeywell

Interactive Instructions 1204 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – Output Instruction Tab - Trend Honeywell

Interactive Instructions 1205 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – Output Advanced Tab Honeywell
• Output Advanced Tab
– Target value description
– Maximum value of target
– Minimum value of target
– Engineering units descriptor
for target
– Description of current value
– Engineering units descriptor
for current value
– Description for entry value
– Maximum value of entry
value
– Minimum value of entry
value
– Engineering units descriptor
for entry value

Interactive Instructions 1206 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Interactive Instructions – HTML Editor Honeywell

• HTML Editor
– Edit in HTML or
Text
– Appearance
• Font
• Color
• Size
– Link to:
• SOP
• Intranet

Interactive Instructions 1207 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Question 2: SCM Expressions Honeywell

SCM Expressions:
A) Cannot be used with a confirmable message
B) Cannot be used to command an SP message
C) Are not permitted to be used in a step output
D) Must ask a question
TheIncorrect.
Your correct
answer:
Correct! answer
SCM is:
SCMExpressions
Expressions cannot
cannotbe
beused
usedwith
withaa
You must answer the question
confirmable before
message.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue. Submit Clear

Interactive Instructions 1208 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• Table View:

– Can be viewed and operated in Control Builder

– Is another way to view and control an SCM

– Allows the operator to interact with the SCM by giving the SCM commands,
bypassing outputs and confirming outputs

– Is configured in control builder on the Main and Output tabs in Step function
blocks

Interactive Instructions 1209 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Lab Examples – 1 of 4 Honeywell
• Configure Target, Entry, and Current Parameters

Interactive Instructions 1210 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Lab Examples – 2 of 4 Honeywell
• Configure an SCM Abort Handler

Interactive Instructions 1211 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Lab Examples – 3 of 4 Honeywell
• Configure an SCM Interrupt Handler

Interactive Instructions 1212 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Lab Examples – 4 of 4 Honeywell
• Configure an SCM Check Handler

Interactive Instructions 1213 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe Interactive Instructions

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the Configure Target, Entry and Current Parameters and Configure
an SCM Abort Handler, Interrupt Handler and Check Handler lab exercises

Interactive Instructions 1214 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe Interactive Instructions 7/5/2023
 Final Projects - Tank Farm and Overview
Display

Final Projects - HMIWeb Display Builder 1215 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Final Projects - Tank Farm and Overview Display 7/5/2023
 Final Project - 1 Honeywell

3
8 6
1

4
9 7
2
9
5

3
1 8 6

9 4
10
2 7

Final Projects - HMIWeb Display Builder 1216 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Final Projects - Tank Farm and Overview Display 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

Design Criteria for a Tank Farm Display

Final Projects - HMIWeb Display Builder 1217 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Final Projects - Tank Farm and Overview Display 7/5/2023
 Honeywell
Final Project - Build a “Tank Farm” graphic with the following elements:

1. Two storage tanks (T-31 and T-32) with level indicators. The indicators will display
the pida.pv for 11_LC16 and 11_LC14 and call the faceplate when clicked.
Breakpoints should be configured on the indicators: 0 to 20% = yellow, blue when
normal (21 to 80%), and red for a high level (81 to 100%).

2. Add alphanumerics (place on each tank as illustrated) to show the value of the
level indicators added in Step 1. Complete the “Tooltip” property of each
alphanumeric to show the tagname and parameter of the alphanumeric.

3. Add a valve on each tank’s inlet line. The tagnames are as follows: 11_FC20 for
the top valve and 11_FC17 for the lower valve. (Use the valve.sha with the OP bar
created in a previous lab but first check the valve to ensure it calls the faceplate.)

4. Add two pumps: Pump P-62 will pump product from the first tank; pump P-68 will
pump product from the second tank. (You can use shape P68 built in a previous lab
exercise.) The pumps will be green when ON and gray when OFF. Use points:
11_HS62 and 11_HS68. Use parameter: devctla.gpv.

Final Projects - HMIWeb Display Builder 1218 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Final Projects - Tank Farm and Overview Display 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

5. Add comboboxes to control the pumps from the graphic (parameter flaga.pv can be
used to change the state of 11_HS62 and 11_HS68.)

6. Create a generic dynamic shape (for PID regulatory control points 11_FC01 and
11_FC02). The dynamic shape should show the point name (which will change color
based on alarm state), the first character of the current mode (i.e. A = Auto), the SP
value, PV value, and a bar indication for the OP. Allow data entry for the SP value.

(Hint: Create a shape sequence for the single-character mode indication. Insert the
shape sequence into the dynamic shape. To view the “ordinal” values of each mode
so that the single-character mode letter will be positioned correctly in your shape
sequence, refer to Knowledge Builder: Experion R300.1 > Reference > Control Builder
Parameter Reference > MODE [RegCtl]). Also, add an alarm indicator to your dynamic
shape.

7. For these same two PID points, insert a valve that is green when the OP > 0 and gray
when <= 0. (Use the previously created valve.sha with the OP bar.)

Final Projects - HMIWeb Display Builder 1219 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Final Projects - Tank Farm and Overview Display 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

8. Add alphanumerics to display the top temperature of each tank -- 11_TI20 for the top
tank and 11_TI25 for the lower tank (use parameter daca.pv). Complete the “Tooltip”
property to show the tagname.

9. Create navigation buttons to call up other displays and a button to hide instrument
lines, as shown on the example “Final Project” display.

10. Create a new Trend display called “Trend”. Plot the pida.pv of 11_FC01 and
11_FC02. Add a button to call the Trend. On the Trend button, add a “Tooltip”
indicating that the Trend is plotting 11_FC01 and 11_FC02.

Final Projects - HMIWeb Display Builder 1220 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Final Projects - Tank Farm and Overview Display 7/5/2023
 Final Project 2 - Overview Display

Final Projects - HMIWeb Display Builder 1221 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Final Projects - Tank Farm and Overview Display 7/5/2023
 Final Project - 2 Honeywell

Final Projects - HMIWeb Display Builder 1222 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Final Projects - Tank Farm and Overview Display 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

Design Criteria for an Overview Display

Final Projects - HMIWeb Display Builder 1223 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Final Projects - Tank Farm and Overview Display 7/5/2023
 Honeywell
Final Project - Build an “Overview” display.

An Overview display is a Level 1 display and provides a big picture of the process.
Level 1 displays provide the broadest view of the facilities under an Operator’s control
and represent a simplified process flow diagram of the whole plant area. Targets
defined on Level 1 displays lead to specific process “control” displays (process displays
are Level 2 displays).

Create an Overview (Level 1) display showing only the prominent equipment and major
process lines. Create invisible targets around each area to call the appropriate Level 2
display.

The four areas to be considered in the Overview display are:

➢ T-100 Debutanizer Tower area (add an alarm indicator on the tank for 11_LC14).
➢ D-100 Debutanizer Reflux Drum area (add an alarm indicator on the tank for
11_LC16).
➢ E-100 Reboiler/Steam Heat Exchanger area (add an alarm indicator on the tank for
11_TC10).
➢ Tank Farm area.

You can use many of the shapes that you’ve already created in previous lab exercises.

Final Projects - HMIWeb Display Builder 1224 EXP03R300 - EPKS Graphics

Final Projects - Tank Farm and Overview Display 7/5/2023
 Control Module Reference

Appendix A 1225 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
FC01 Honeywell

Appendix A 1226 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
FC17 Honeywell

Appendix A 1227 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
FC18 Honeywell

Appendix A 1228 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
HS14A Honeywell

Appendix A 1229 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
HS_A Honeywell

Appendix A 1230 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
HS62 Honeywell

Appendix A 1231 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
HS63 Honeywell

Appendix A 1232 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
LC14 Honeywell

Appendix A 1233 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
PC16 Honeywell

Appendix A 1234 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
TI20 Honeywell

Appendix A 1235 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Appendix A 1236 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Control Module Reference 7/5/2023
 Identify PMIO Hardware

PMIO 1237 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• This lesson introduces you to the layout of a
typical PMIO cabinet and its main components

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be

able to:

– Describe the layout of a typical PMIO cabinet

– Describe the PMIO power subsystem chassis

and components

PMIO 1238 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• PMIO Cabinet Components

• PMIO Power Subsystem

PMIO 1239 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Cabinet Layout Honeywell

• Three Main Components

– I/O Processor Card Files

– C200 Controller

– Power Subsystem

PMIO 1240 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• PMIO Cabinet Components

• PMIO Power Subsystem

PMIO 1241 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Power Subsystem Chassis Honeywell

Back plane

Power supply
tray

Tray for 24V

batteries

PMIO 1242 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Power Subsystem Components Honeywell

72-hour CMOS Power distribution

Memory backup connectors

Battery Backup
switch
Grounding
And alarm
contacts

Redundant
Power
Supplies

24V battery backup –

25-minute power
Supply backup

PMIO 1243 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Question 1: PMIO Cabinet Layout and Power Subsystem Honeywell
A typical PM IO cabinet contains all of the following except:
A) I/O process card files, a C200 controller and a power
subsystem
B) Experion Server
C) A 72-hour CMOS memory backup
D) A 24 V battery for 25 minutes of backup power

The
Your correct
answer:
Incorrect.
Correct! AAanswer
typical is:
typicalPM
PMIO IOcabinet
cabinetwill
willcontain
contain
Youofmust
all these answer
exceptthe
thequestion
Experionbefore
Server.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

PMIO 1244 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• A typical PMIO cabinet has 3 sections. Top to bottom they are:

– I/O processor cards

– A C200 controller
– A power subsystem
• The power subsystem can have:

– Redundant power supplies

– Full power battery backup
– CMOS battery backup for databases on the PMIO cards

PMIO 1245 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Identify PMIO Hardware

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

PMIO 1246 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Identify PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
 Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the
PMIO

PMIO 1247 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson, you will learn about the C200
and PMIO interface components contained in
the C200 rack

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be

able to:

– Describe the I/O link interface module (IOLIM)

– Identify the I/O link (IOL) interface cable and

connections

PMIO 1248 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• IOLIM
• IOL Interface Cable and Connections

PMIO 1249 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
PMIO Hardware – C200 Chassis Honeywell
• I/O link interface module (IOLIM)

PMIO 1250 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
PMIO Hardware – C200 Chassis, contd. Honeywell
• IOLIM functional requirements and
capacities

– IOLIM supports a maximum of 40 I/O

processors (IOPs)

• Redundant IOPs count as one module

– C200 supports a maximum of 2 IOLIMs and

64 I/O modules

• Any combination of rack, rail, or PM types

– IOLIM requires IOL cables A and B

PMIO 1251 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
PMIO Hardware – C200 Chassis, contd. Honeywell
• IOLIM installation

– Must be installed in a C200 rack

– Can be made redundant with another IOLIM in

another C200 rack

– Requires these jumper settings:

• Shield jumpers for IOL cable

• IOL address jumpers

PMIO 1252 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
PMIO Hardware – C200 Chassis, contd. Honeywell
• Shield Jumpers for IOL cable

– Jumpers for link A and for link B

Shield jumpers A and B

in IOLIM

Top of IOLIM

PMIO 1253 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
PMIO Hardware – C200 Chassis, contd. Honeywell

• Shield Jumpers for IOL cable in IOP chassis

Shield jumpers
A and B

IOL cable connectors

A and B

PMIO 1254 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
PMIO Hardware – C200 Chassis, contd. Honeywell
• IOL address jumper

– Only important when IOLIM is redundant

– Redundant partner must be different (one in, one out)

– Doesn’t matter which is which

– If not redundant, can be in or out

IOL address jumper

Bottom of IOLIM

PMIO 1255 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
Question 1: IOPs Honeywell
How many IOPs can an IOLIM support?
A) 2
B) 10
C) 40
D) 64

Yourcorrect
The answer:answer is:
You must Each
Incorrect.
Correct! EachIOLIM
answer IOLIM can
cansupport
the questionsupport40
40IOPs.
before IOPs.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

PMIO 1256 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
Question 2: Redundant IOLIMs Honeywell
For redundant IOLIMs, the link address jumper must be set in:
A) One of the two IOLIMs (doesn't matter which one)
B) Both IOLIMs
C) The power subsystem compartment
D) None of the above

Bottom of IOLIM

Incorrect.
Correct! For
Forredundant
redundantIOLIMs
IOLIMsthethelink
linkaddress
addressjumper
jumper
The
Your correct
answer:answer is:
must be set in one of the two IOLIMs. It does not matter
You must answer the question before
notwhich
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You -answer
-Clickofanywhere
answered
Click IOLIM
anywhere
this
this hastothe
question
correctly!
to jumper set.
continue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

PMIO 1257 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell
• IOLIM

• IOL Interface Cable and Connections

PMIO 1258 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
PMIO Hardware – C200 Chassis Honeywell
• IOL interface cable layout
IOL interface
To IOLIM cable Length: 2,
RJ-45 To IO link
5 and 10 meters Cable B
Connector B

To IOLIM
RJ-45
Connector A

To IO link
Cable A
To C200 rack
24VDC power
supply

To cabinet power Power cable

Subsystem output Length: 2, 5 and 10
connector meters

PMIO 1259 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
PMIO Hardware – C200 Chassis, contd. Honeywell
• IOL interface cable
– Connection at IOLIM

PMIO 1260 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
PMIO Hardware – C200 Chassis, contd. Honeywell
• IOL interface cable

Power distribution
panel connection

PMIO 1261 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
PMIO Hardware – C200 Chassis, contd. Honeywell
• 24VDC Power Supply

PMIO 1262 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
Question 3: IOL Interface Cable and Connections Honeywell
The IOL interface cables connect to all of these except:

A) IOLIM RJ-45 connectors A and B

B) IOL cables A and B
C) C200 rack 24VDC power supply
D) IOLIM power subsystem

Incorrect.
Correct! The
TheIOL IOLinterface
interfacecable
cabledoes
doesnotnotconnect
connectto
tothe
the
"IOLIM
Yourcorrect
The answer:power subsystem".
answer is: There is no IOLIM power
subsystem.
You mustThe IOL interface
answer cablebefore
the question connects to the cabinet
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
power correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
subsystem.
continuing

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

PMIO 1263 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• The hardware required to interface the C200 to the PMIO includes the
IOLIM and IOL cables

– A C200 supports up to 2 IOLIMs and 64 I/O modules

– An IOLIM supports up to 40 IOPs
– Shield jumpers for IO Link Cables A and B are located on both the IOLIM
and the PMIO backplane

– For redundant IOLIMs, the link address jumper must be set in one of the two
IOLIMs (does not matter which one)

– The IOL cable connects to:

• IOLIM RJ-45 connectors A and B

• IOL cables A and B

• C200 rack 24VDC power supply

• Cabinet power subsystem

PMIO 1264 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

PMIO 1265 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

PMIO 1266 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the C200 Hardware Interface to the PMIO 7/5/2023
 Describe the I/O Card File

PMIO 1267 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn about the
components of the I/O processor card file
found in the PMIO cabinet

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be

able to:

– Identify the I/O link (IOL) interface cable

connections

– Locate an I/O processor (IOP) in a card file

– Explain card file addressing

– Identify the power connections

PMIO 1268 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• IOL Connections
• IOP Location
• Card File Addressing
• Power Connections

PMIO 1269 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
IOL Interface Cable Connections – PMIO Honeywell

Cards 1 - 15

01 File 5

Server

IOLIM
C200
CNI
PCIC Cards 1 - 15

File 4

24
IOL cables
Cards 1 - 15

File 3

PMIO 1270 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
IOL Interface Cable Connections on IOP Card File Honeywell

Cards 1 - 15

IOL cable connectors

A and B

PMIO 1271 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• IOL Connections

• IOP Location
• Card File Addressing

• Power Connections

PMIO 1272 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
IOP Card File Locations – PMIO Honeywell

Cards 1 - 15

01 File 5

Server

IOLIM
C200
CNI
PCIC Cards 1 - 15

File 4

24
IOL cables
Cards 1 - 15

File 3

PMIO 1273 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
IOP Locations – PMIO Honeywell
• Card file with cover plate

– IOP cards are referenced by their numerical location within each card file.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

PMIO 1274 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• IOL Connections

• IOP Location

• Card File Addressing

• Power Connections

PMIO 1275 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
IOP Card File Locations – PMIO Honeywell
File number
jumpers
Cards 1 - 15

01 File 5

Server

IOLIM
C200
CNI
PCIC Cards 1 - 15

File 4

24
IOL cables Cards 1 - 15

File 3

PMIO 1276 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
File Number Jumpers for IOP Chassis Honeywell

• File numbers range from 1 to 8

File number jumpers

PMIO 1277 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
File Number Jumpers for IOP Chassis Honeywell
• Pin setting is one less than actual file number

• Odd parity

P 4 2 1 P 4 2 1 P 4 2 1
FILE ADDR FILE ADDR FILE ADDR

File # 3 File # 4 File # 8

Pinned 2 Pinned 3 Pinned 7

PMIO 1278 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
UCN Address Jumpers Honeywell
• UCN address jumpers do not apply to Experion PKS

UCN address jumpers – do

not set these (remove)

PMIO 1279 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
Question 1: File Addressing Honeywell
When setting address jumpers for card file #6 which
pins must have jumpers ?
A) 4, 1
B) 4, 1, P
C) 4, 2
P 4 2 1
D) 4, 2, P FILE ADDR

Incorrect.
Correct! For
Forcardcardfile
file#6,
#6,pins,
pins,4,
4,11and
andPPmust
musthave
havejumpers.
jumpers.
Since we are pinning out card file #6 we actually pin it as #5
Yourcorrect
The answer: answer is:
therefore we pin 4 and 1. When we do this we have an even
You must
number answer set
of -answer
jumpers the which
question before
You Incorrect
Correct
did You
not answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis togoes
question
correctly!
to against the odd parity rule.
continue
continue
completely
continuing
This rule states that at all times an odd number of jumpers must
be set. Therefore we must set the 'P' parity jumper.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

PMIO 1280 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• IOL Connections

• IOP Location

• Card File Addressing

• Power Connections

PMIO 1281 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
Power for IOP Chassis Honeywell
• Power from power subsystem

– Redundant power cables from subsystem

– Redundant power supplies (optional)

PMIO 1282 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
Question 2: IOP Jumpers and Connections Honeywell

C
B D

Which of these are IOP card file number jumpers?

A) A
B) B
C) C
D) D

TheIncorrect!
Your correct
answer:
Correct!answer
Pictureis:
Picture 'A'
'A'shows
showsthetheIOP
IOPcard
cardfile
file
You must answernumber the question
jumpers. before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

PMIO 1283 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• An I/O processor card file found in the PMIO cabinet:

– Links to the IOLIM in the C200 rack and to other I/O processor card files
through I/O link (IOL) interface cables

– Contains
plate
up to 15 IOPs identified by the card numbers on the card file cover

– Has a card file number that ranges from 1 through 8

• Numbers are set by jumpers as 0 through 7 with odd parity

• Card file jumpers are not to be confused with the UCN address jumpers
(which do not apply to Experion PKS)

– Gets power from the PMIO power subsystem

PMIO 1284 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the I/O Card File

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

PMIO 1285 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

PMIO 1286 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the I/O Card File 7/5/2023
 Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware

PMIO 1287 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn how to configure PMIO hardware in Control
Builder
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will know how to:

– Configure an I/O link interface module (IOLIM)

– Add I/O processor (IOP) modules to the I/O link (IOL)

– Load and activate IOPs

PMIO 1288 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Configuring an IOLIM
• Adding IOPs to the IOL
• Loading and Activating IOPs

PMIO 1289 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Configure an IOLIM Honeywell
• Select IOLIM from the list of interface modules

– An IOLIM appears in the Project tab and

– A configuration dialog box opens (next slide)

PMIO 1290 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Configure an IOLIM, contd. Honeywell
• Enter configuration parameters and click OK
IOLIM slot
number

Supervisory
CNI module

Check if
IOLIM is
redundant

Fill in
secondary
IOLIM name
if redundant

PMIO 1291 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Configure an IOLIM, contd. Honeywell
• Double-click the IOL under the IOLIM in Project

• Enter a name and description

PMIO 1292 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Question 1: Configuring an IOLIM Honeywell
When you configure an IOLIM, you must complete all of these steps except:

A) Create the IOLIM in Control Builder

B) Enter IOLIM configuration parameters including the
C200 chassis slot number in which it resides
C) Create a new IOL for the IOLIM and enter its name
and description
D) Enter the name and description for the IOL that is
created automatically when you create the IOLIM

Yourcorrect
The answer:answer is:
You must answer the question before
Yes!
No.
did When
When
YouIncorrect
Correct
You you
you
Clickconfigure
not -answer
answered
-Click configure
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis an
antoIOLIM,
question IOLIM,
correctly!
to you
you must
continue
continue must
completely
continuing
complete all of these steps except "Create a new
IOL for the IOLIM and enter its name and
description". When an IOLIM is added the IOL is
automatically created by Control Builder.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

PMIO 1293 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Configuring an IOLIM

• Adding IOPs to the IOL

• Loading and Activating IOPs

PMIO 1294 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Add IOPs Honeywell
• Add IOP modules to the IOL
– Click and drag from Library to Project

– Or select from I/O Modules

PMIO 1295 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Assign IOPs Honeywell
• Assign the IOP to the IOL

PMIO 1296 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Assign IOPs, contd. Honeywell
• Assigned IOPs appear under their IOL

PMIO 1297 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Add IOPs Honeywell
• Configure the IOP

Choose a
scan rate

IOP
number,
1 – 40

Check if IOP is
Physical IOP redundant Physical location of
location secondary IOP

PMIO 1298 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Question 2: IOP Assignment Honeywell
IOPs are assigned to:

A) A control execution environment (CEE)

B) An IOLIM
C) An IOL
D) Nothing. IOPs remain unassigned

The correct
Your answer:answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! IOPs
IOPsare areassigned
assignedto toan
anIOL.
IOL.
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

PMIO 1299 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Configuring an IOLIM

• Adding IOPs to the IOL


• Loading and Activating IOPs

PMIO 1300 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Loading IOLIM, IOL, and IOPs Honeywell
• Right click the IOLIM

– Select Load with Contents

PMIO 1301 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Loading IOLIM, IOL, and IOPs, contd. Honeywell
• Verify the load list

• Do not check

PMIO 1302 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Loading IOLIM, IOL, and IOPs, contd. Honeywell
• After successful load, Monitor tab displays IOPs in blue

– Indicates IOP is inactive

PMIO 1303 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Loading IOLIM, IOL, and IOPs, contd. Honeywell
• In Project, IOP channels appear under the
IOP

• In Monitoring, IOP channels appear under

the IOP only after the CM that uses the
channel is downloaded

PMIO 1304 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Loading IOLIM, IOL, and IOPs, contd. Honeywell
• When valid, LED turns green

– IOP changes from yellow to blue in Monitor tree

• IOP can be activated from the monitoring tree or from a combo box

– (Run = Active)

PMIO 1305 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Question 3: Loading and Activating IOPs Honeywell
Which statements about loading and activating IOPs is false?

A) The IOL is automatically loaded with its IOLIM

B) The Project tab displays IOPs in blue when
they are located successfully
C) IOP channels appear under the IOP in the
Project tab
D) An IOP can be activated by changing its
execution state to Run

Incorrect.
Correct! The
Thefalse
falsestatement
statementisis""TheTheProject
Projecttab
tab
The
Your correct
answer:
displays answer
IOPs is:when they are loaded." Actually
in blue
the You musttab
Monitor answer the the
displays question
IOPS before
in blue. The Project
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
tab will not display colors next to the IOPS.

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

PMIO 1306 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When you configure an IOLIM and its associated hardware, remember:

– Create and configure the IOLIM in Control Builder

– The IOL is created automatically when you create the IOLIM
– Assign IOPs to the IOL and not the IOLIM

– The Monitor tab displays IOPs in blue when they are loaded successfully

PMIO 1307 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

PMIO 1308 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware 7/5/2023
 Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel
Blocks in CMs

PMIO 1309 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn to configure a PMIO channel block in a
control module (CM)
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will know how to:
– Configure and load a PMIO channel block
– Activate and delete a PMIO channel block

PMIO 1310 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Configuring and Loading a PMIO Channel Block

• Activating and Deleting a PMIO Channel Block

PMIO 1311 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Adding and Assigning a Channel Block Honeywell
• First, add and assign a PMIO channel block; then, configure the block
parameters

– Two methods to add and assign a PMIO channel block:

• Method 1: Add block from Library -- PMIO tree;

then, assign to specific a IOP and a specific channel

• Method 2: Add block from Project – the specific IOP and specific
channel are automatically assigned

PMIO 1312 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Adding and Assigning a Channel Block, contd. Honeywell
• Method 1: Library – PMIO tree
– Click and drag the channel block to a CM

PMIO 1313 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Assigning a Channel Block, contd. Honeywell
• Right click the block to assign

Right-click Select Function

Block Assign

PMIO 1314 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Assigning a Channel Block, contd. Honeywell
• The Function Block Assignment dialog box appears

Select a channel from

the list of available IOP
channels

Click Assign

PMIO 1315 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Verifying the Channel Block Assignment Honeywell
• After assigning an IOP channel, verify the IOP name and channel
number appear in the block

IOP and channel

now assigned

PMIO 1316 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Adding and Assigning a Channel Block Honeywell
• Method 2: Project

– Click and drag from the IOP in Project

IOP and channel

assigned
automatically

PMIO 1317 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Channel Block Name Honeywell

After assignment, the channel name

becomes:
CM name.Function Block name

PMIO 1318 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Configuring a Channel Block Honeywell
• Configure the IO channel block in the Parameters dialog box

– Enter a name and description in the Main tab

PMIO 1319 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Configuring a Channel Block, contd. Honeywell
• Configure the IO channel block in the Parameters dialog box

– Enter appropriate parameters in the Configuration tab

PMIO 1320 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Wiring and Downloading the Function Blocks Honeywell

• Soft-wire the CM blocks

• Download

PMIO 1321 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Downloading the CM Honeywell
• In Monitoring, IOP channels appear under
the IOP after downloading the CM that uses
the channel

PMIO 1322 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Question 1: Loading a PMIO Channel Block Honeywell
You must download a CM that uses a channel block to see the channel
block in which tab in the Control Builder:

A) Library tab
B) Monitoring tab
C) Project tab
D) All of the above

Incorrect. You must download a CM that uses a

Correct! You must download a CM that uses a channel
channelanswer
block to
is:see the channel block in the
Your
The correct
answer:
block to see the channel block in the Monitoring tab.
Monitoring tab. In, Monitoring, IOP channels appear
In,
YouMonitoring,
must answer IOP the
channels appear
question under the IOP
before
under
You didthe
notIOP
Incorrect
Correct
You onlyanywhere
-answer
answered
-Click
Click after the
anywhere
thisthis CM
question that
correctly!
to uses the channel
tocontinue
continue
completely
only after the CMcontinuing
that uses the channel is downloaded.
is downloaded.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit Clear

PMIO 1323 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• Configuring and Loading a PMIO Channel Block

• Activating and Deleting a PMIO Channel Block

PMIO 1324 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Activating IOP Channels Honeywell

• PMIO channel blocks have

execution states: active and
inactive

– If inactive, channel blocks appear

blue in Monitoring

• Under the CM

• Under the IOPs

PMIO 1325 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Activating IOP Channels Honeywell
• There are many options to activate IOP channels:
– Activate IOP channels directly:
• Under the CM or under the IOP

PMIO 1326 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Activating IOP Channels, contd. Honeywell

• There are many options to activate IOP channels

– Activate from the CM

• With the CM

• Without the CM

PMIO 1327 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Channels in the Monitor Tab Honeywell
• Activation causes channel blocks
to turn green

– Under the CM

– Under the IOPs

PMIO 1328 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Deleting IOP Channels Honeywell
• IOP channels cannot be deleted
from the IOL

• The only way to delete IOP

channels is to delete the CM that
uses them

PMIO 1329 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Question 2: Activating and Deleting IOP Channels Honeywell
An IOP channel block is not:
A) Activated from the CM with or without
activating the CM
B) Activated directly under the CM or under
the IOP in the Monitoring tab
C) Green in the Monitoring tab when it has
been activated
D) Deleted from its IOL

Incorrect.
Correct! An
AnIOPIOPchannel
channelblock
blockisisnot
notdeleted
deleted
The correct
Your answer:answer is:
from its IOL. It can only be deleted by
Youdeleting
must answer the
the anywhere
CM question
that containsbefore
it.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

PMIO 1330 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• A PMIO channel block:

– Can be added and assigned to a CM from the Library Tab (PMIO tree) or
from the Project Tab

– Is inactive or blue in Monitoring until activated when it turns green

– Can be activated from the CM with or without activating the CM
– Can
tab
be activated directly under the CM or under the IOP in the Monitoring

– Can be deleted only by deleting the CM that contains it

PMIO 1331 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CM

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

PMIO 1332 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs 7/5/2023
 Describe the HART Functionality in C200
Operations

PMIO 1333 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Introduction Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn about HART device functionality

• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:

– Describe HART signals

– Distinguish among HART universal, common practice and device-specific

commands

– Explain how the device description (DD) files are loaded to the system

– Describe the types and characteristics of

HART-enabled I/O

– Distinguish between HART control-related data and

offline data and how they flow through the system

– Explain the purpose of the general status and

device-specific status for a HART device and
where the statuses can be viewed in the system

PMIO 1334 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• HART Signals
• HART Commands
• HART Device Description Manager
• HART-Enabled I/O
• HART Data
• HART Device Status

PMIO 1335 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
HART Signal Characteristics Honeywell

+0.5 mA

- 0.5 mA
1200 2200
FSK Hz Hz
The digital signal rides on top of “1” “0”
the 4-20 mA DC analog signal
20 mA -

4 mA -

• Traditional wiring and well understood implementation

• Hybrid (analog and digital signals)
• Command/response (half-duplex) communication structure

PMIO 1336 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Device Signaling Honeywell

HART Input Device: HART Output Device:

24 Vdc
4-20 mA 4-20 mA

Digital component is always bidirectional

The HART digital signal is superimposed on the

standard 4-20 mA signal

All memory resident device data is accessed using

this digital portion of the protocol

PMIO 1337 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Question 1: HART Signals Honeywell
Which statement about HART signals is false?

20 mA -

4 mA -

A) HART uses a traditional analog signal to represent

the primary control variable
B) HART uses a digital signal to provide access to the
information resident in the device memory
C) HART input devices generate the analog signal and
are wired to AI modules
D) HART output devices are driven by the analog signal
and wired to AO modules
E) The digital signal is unidirectional

Correct!
The
YourIncorrect.
The
correct
answer: The
falsefalse
answer statement
is: statement is " The
is " The
digital
You digital
signal
must signal
is unidirectional'.
answer isthe
unidirectional'.
question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing Submit Clear
Click anywhere to continue.

PMIO 1338 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• HART Signals


• HART Commands

• HART Device Description Manager

• HART-enabled I/O

• HART Data

• HART Device Status

PMIO 1339 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
HART Command Ranges Honeywell
• Universal Commands (0-30):
– Represents the basic command set required by most HART devices
– All commands in this set must be supported by all HART devices
– Commands must be implemented exactly as specified by the HART foundation specification
– DD interpretation is not required for this command set

• Common Practice Commands (32-121):

– A set of commands applicable to a wide range of devices
– This command set should be supported by devices whenever possible, but this is not mandatory
– Although the function of each command is well defined by the HART foundation specification,
the actual meaning of the response data may require the interpretation of vendor DD files

• Device-specific Commands (128-253):

– This Command set is completely defined by the device vendor
– Each command performs a function specific to the particular device type and model
– The use of these commands requires full interpretation of the vendor DD files

DD -Device description file

PMIO 1340 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Device-specific Commands Honeywell
• Device-specific commands (128-253) are set by the device
manufacturer, so they will be different for each manufacturer and
product type

• Some examples of device-specific commands in the Honeywell

temperature transmitter are the ability to:
– Pick the specific input type: T, J, or K thermocouple; 3- or 4-wire RTD; and
so on

– Alarm on input break detection

– Determine whether a meter is installed and determine its units and range

– Turn write protection on or off with password protection

PMIO 1341 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• HART Signals

• HART Commands


• HART Device Description Manager

• HART-enabled I/O

• HART Data

• HART Device Status

PMIO 1342 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
HART Device Description Manager Honeywell

• There is no need to load Honeywell DD files because they are

automatically loaded with the Experion software

• DD files for other vendors are available from the vendor or the HART
Foundation at http://www.hartcomm.org/

PMIO 1343 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
HART Device Description Manager Honeywell
• To load device description files:

– Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Engineering Tools > Device
Description Manager

PMIO 1344 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Question 2: HART Command and Device Descriptions Honeywell
Device – specific commands:
A) Are applicable to a wide range of devices and may
require the interpretation of vendor DD files
B) For Honeywell devices are interpreted from DD files DD
automatically loaded with Experion software
C) Represent the basic command set required by most Device Description
HART devices file
D) Require no interpretation of vendor DD files

Yes!
No. Device-specific
Device-specific commands
commands for for Honeywell
Honeywell
devices
Your
The are answer
correct
answer: interpretedis: from DD files which are
automatically loaded with the Experion
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
software. correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

PMIO 1345 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• HART Signals

• HART Commands

• HART Device Description Manager


• HART-enabled I/O

• HART Data

• HART Device Status

PMIO 1346 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
HART-enabled I/O Honeywell
Non-redundant CIOM-A Redundant PMIO
Chassis I/O format Chassis I/O format

8-channel HART AI
8-channel HART AO

16-channel HART AI
16-channel HART AO

PMIO 1347 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
HART-enabled I/O – Direct Connection Honeywell

All HART analog

and digital data Experion PKS Server
passes through the
HART-enabled I/O

C200 Characteristics:
✓ Reduced hardware and physical foot print
✓ One communication network
✓ HART variables are available for control
✓ HART status is available for control
✓ Effective/efficient status handling
✓ All HART data is available through the system

Non-redundant HART
Redundant HART CIOM-A (1756) AI and AO IOM
PM AI and AO IOP (8 channels/IOM)
(16 channels/IOP)

PMIO 1348 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• HART Signals

• HART Commands

• HART Device Description Manager

• HART-enabled I/O


• HART Data

• HART Device Status

PMIO 1349 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Control-related Data is Cached on the IOM Honeywell
Control Honeywell
Processor Control Field
System Device Manager

The HART command originates from the IOM/IOP

and the response is cached in the IOM/IOP
I/O
✓ Device ID information (Tag, manufacturer, model, SN, etc.)
✓ Software and hardware revision level
✓ Dynamic variables (PV, SV, TV, FV)
HART ✓ Device variables up to 255 (Slot-0 through Slot-3)
Device ✓ General and device-specific status information
✓ Range related information
✓ Device material of construction
✓ Full device setup and configuration information
✓ Trends and test analysis data

PMIO 1350 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Offline Data is Passed Through Honeywell
Control
Asset
Processor Control
Management
System
System

The HART offline data passes through the IOM/IOP and the
software multiplexer to the Asset Management System

I/O
✓ Device ID information (Tag, manufacturer, model, SN, etc.)
✓ Software and hardware revision level
✓ Dynamic variables (PV, SV, TV, FV)
HART ✓ Device variables up to 255 (Slot-0 through Slot-3)
Device ✓ General and device-specific status information
✓ Range related information
✓ Device material of construction
✓ Full device setup and configuration information
✓ Trends and test analysis data

PMIO 1351 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Topics Honeywell

• HART Signals

• HART Commands

• HART Device Description Manager

• HART-enabled I/O

• HART Data


• HART Device Status

PMIO 1352 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
HART Device Status Honeywell
• Every HART device must return a general status with every command
response
• The device-specific status is optional
Device General Status:

Communication error

Field device malfunction

Configuration changed

Cold start (power up reset)

Optional device-specific
More status available errors and conditions

Loop current fixed

Loop current saturated (PV out of limits)

Non-primary variable out of limits

Primary variable out of limits

PMIO 1353 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Control Module (CM) Association Honeywell

Associated control module

PMIO 1354 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Sample - STT25H Device-specific Status Honeywell

STT25H
Host issues Command 48 The STT25H uses only 3 of the
available 17 bytes (byte 0, 1, and 2)
Device responds with status

Byte – 0 Critical Byte – 1 Non-Critical Byte – 2 Information

0 undefined 0 CJ Over Temp 0 Suspect Input

1 Hardware Failure 1 undefined 1 undefined

2 Input Open 2 Input out of Spec 2 undefined

3 NVM Calib Failed 3 Output Saturated 3 undefined

4 NVM Conf Failed 4 In Output Mode 4 undefined

5 undefined 5 undefined 5 undefined

6 undefined 6 undefined 6 undefined

7 undefined 7 User Correct Active 7 4 Wires Configuration

PMIO 1355 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Device-specific Status Can Be Used in Control Honeywell
Command 48 Byte-0 Control Module
Bit HCMD48BT[#] DD Descriptor

Honeywell 0 [0] undefined

HART AI
STT255
1 [1] Hardware Block
Temperature Failure
Transmitter
2 [2] Input Open
HCMD48BT[1] pin
3 [3] NVM Calib
Failed
4 [4] NVM Conf IN(1) IN(2)
Failed
5 [5] undefined LOGIC: AND

6 [6] undefined ANDA

7 [7] undefined

LOGIC: ONDELAY

DELATA
Delay Time 30 sec

PMIO 1356 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Question 3: HART Device Status Honeywell
Which statement is false? A HART device:
A) Must return a general status with every command
response
B) Optionally, may return a device specific status with
every command response
C) Communication error, which is a general status may
be used in control
D) Responds to a command issued by the IOM/IOP
with a status

No.
Yes!correct
The
Your "A"AHART
HART
answer: device
device
answer communication
is:communicationerror,
error,which
whichis
isaageneral
general
You status,
must status,
answermay
may
thebe
beused
usedininbefore
question control"
control"isisthe
the
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
false this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
statement. continue
completely
continuing

Click anywhere to continue.

Submit Clear

PMIO 1357 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Summary Honeywell
• When working with HART devices, remember:
– HART signals have a high-frequency, bidirectional digital component and a
low-frequency, unidirectional analog component

– HART commands include:

• Mandatory Universal commands that do not require DDs
• Optional Common practice commands that may require DDs
• Device-specific commands defined by device vendors that require DDs

– Honeywell DD files are automatically loaded with the Experion software

while non-Honeywell DD files are loaded using the DD Manager

– The HART command originates in the IOM/IOP and the control-related data
are cached there

– AbutHART device must return a general status with every command response
a device-specific status is optional

PMIO 1358 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
Conclusion Honeywell

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations

Completion
Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material

PMIO 1359 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023
 Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

PMIO 1360 EXP20R300 - EPKS CEE C200/C300/ACE

Describe the HART Functionality in C200 Operations 7/5/2023